Yamaha CLP-50 El manual del propietario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: CLP-50

Categoría: Pianos digitales

Tipo: El manual del propietario

Owner's Manual

Bedienungsanleitung

Mode d'emploi

Manual de instrucciones

Before using the Clavinova, be sure to read “PRECAUTIONS„ on pages 6 -7.

Achten Sie darauf, vor Einsatz des Clavinova die “VORSICHTSMASSNAHMEN„ auf Seite 6-7

durchzulesen.

Avant d'utiliser le Clavinova, lire attentivement la section «PRECAUTIONS D'USAGE» aux

pages 6- 7.

Antes de utilizar el Clavinova, lea las “PRECAUCIONES„ que debe tener en cuenta en las páginas

6- 7.

IMPORTANT

Check your power supply

Make sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage specified on the name plate

on the bottom panel. In some areas a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of

the main keyboard unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the

voltage in your area. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. To

change the setting use a "minus" screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage

appears next to the pointer on the panel.

WICHTIG

Überprüfung der Stromversorgung

Vergewissern Sie sich vor dem Anschließen an das Stromnetz, daß die örtliche Netzspannung den

Betriebsspannungswerten auf dem Typenschild an der Unterseite des Instruments entspricht. In

bestimmten Verkaufsgebieten ist das Instrument mit einem Spannungswähler an der Unterseite

neben der Netzkabeldurchführung ausgestattet. Falls vorhanden, muß der Spannungswähler auf

die örtliche Netzspannung eingestellt werden. Der Spannungswähler wurde werkseitig auf 240 V

voreingestellt. Zum Verstellen drehen Sie den Spannungsregler mit einem Schlitzschraubendreher,

bis der Zeiger auf den korrekten Spannungswert weist.

IMPORTANT

Contrôler la source d'alimentation

Vérifiez que la tension spécifiée sur le panneau inférieur correspond à la tension du secteur. Dans

certaines régions, l'instrument peut être équipé d'un sélecteur de tension situé sur le panneau

inférieur du clavier à proximité du cordon d'alimentation.

Vérifiez que ce sélecteur est bien réglé en fonction de la tension secteur de votre région. Le

sélecteur de tension est réglé sur 240 V au départ d'usine. Pour modifier ce réglage, utilisez un

tournevis à lame plate pour tourner le sélecteur afin de mettre l'indication correspondant à la

tension de votre région vis à vis du repère triangulaire situé sur le panneau.

IMPORTANTE

Verifique la alimentación de corriente

Asegúrese de que tensión de alimentación de CA de su área corresponde con la tensión

especificada en la placa de características del panel inferior. En algunas zonas puede haberse

incorporado un selector de tensión en el panel inferior de la unidad del teclado principal, cerca del

cable de alimentación. Asegúrese de que el selector de tensión esté ajustado a la tensión de su

área. El selector de tensión se ajusta a 240V cuando la unidad sale de fábrica. Para cambiar el

ajuste, emplee un destornillador de cabeza "recta" para girar el selector de modo que aparezca la

tensión correcta al lado del indicador del panel.

Clavinova Web site (English only)

http://www.yamahaclavinova.com/

Yamaha Manual Library

http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/

M.D.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation

2002 Yamaha Corporation

V856070AP???.?-0?B0 Printed in Indonesia

DIC 338

Introduction

92-469

(bottom)

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS:

Yamaha electronic

products may have either labels similar to the graphics

shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these

graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these

graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions

indicated on this page and those indicated in the safety

instruction section.

See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings.

The exclamation point within the

equilateral triangle is intended to alert

the user to the presence of important

operating and maintenance (servic-

ing) instructions in the literature

accompanying the product.

The lightning ﬂash with arrowhead

symbol, within the equilateral trian-

gle, is intended to alert the user to the

presence of uninsulated “dangerous

voltage” within the product’s enclo-

sure that may be of sufﬁcient magni-

tude to constitute a risk of electrical

shock.

IMPORTANT NOTICE:

All Yamaha electronic products

are tested and approved by an independent safety testing

laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is

properly installed and used in its normal and customary

manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO

NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so

unless speciﬁcally authorized by Yamaha. Product perfor-

mance and/or safety standards may be diminished.

Claims ﬁled under the expressed warranty may be denied

if the unit is/has been modiﬁed. Implied warranties may

also be affected.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:

The

information contained in this manual is believed to be

correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves

the right to change or modify any of the speciﬁcations

without notice or obligation to update existing units.

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:

Yamaha strives to pro-

duce products that are both user safe and environmentally

friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the

production methods used to produce them, meet these

goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the

law, we want you to be aware of the following:

Battery Notice:

This product MAY contain a small non-

rechargable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in

place. The average life span of this type of battery is

approximately ﬁve years. When replacement becomes

necessary, contact a qualiﬁed service representative to

perform the replacement.

Warning:

Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or

incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away

from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as

regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the

servicer is required by law to return the defective parts.

However, you do have the option of having the servicer

dispose of these parts for you.

Disposal Notice:

Should this product become damaged

beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is consid-

ered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and

federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products

that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc.

NOTICE:

Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl-

edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the

unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the man-

ufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners respon-

sibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult

your dealer before requesting service.

NAME PLATE LOCATION:

The graphic below indi-

cates the location of the name plate. The model number,

serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on

this plate. You should record the model number, serial

number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided

below and retain this manual as a permanent record of

your purchase.

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK.

DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).

NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.

REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

CLP-130

Model

Serial No.

Purchase Date

CLP-120

CLP-130/120

About this Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Thank you for purchasing the Yamaha Clavinova! We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can

fully take advantage of the advanced and convenient functions of the Clavinova.

We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference.

About this Owner’s Manual

This manual consists of three main sections: “Introduction,” “Reference” and “Appendix.”

Introduction (page 2):

Please read this section ﬁrst.

Reference (page 13):

This section explains how to make detailed settings for the Clavinova’s various functions.

Appendix (page 69):

This section introduces reference material.

*The models CLP-130/120 will be referred to as the CLP/Clavinova in this Owner’s Manual.

*The illustrations and LED displays shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only and may appear

somewhat different from those on your instrument.

Trademarks:

•Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.

•Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation.

•All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.

This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with

respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all

computer software, MIDI ﬁles, WAVE data. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal

use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DIS-

TRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES.

“The Clavinova-Computer Connection,”

is a supplementary guidebook that describes, for beginners, what you can

do with your Clavinova and a personal computer and how to set up a Clavinova-Computer system (the manual is not

written for any speciﬁc models). The document is available as a PDF ﬁle (in English) at the following Internet address:

Clavinova Web site (English only):

http://www.yamahaclavinova.com/

Yamaha Manual Library:

http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/

CLP-130/120

Table of Contents

ENGLISH

Table of Contents

Introduction

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION ...................... 2

About this Owner’s Manual........................ 3

Application Index........................................ 5

PRECAUTIONS............................................. 6

Accessories .................................................. 8

Maintenance ............................................... 8

Features....................................................... 9

Before Using the Clavinova ...................... 10

Key Cover ...........................................................10

Music Rest ..........................................................10

Turning the Power On.......................................11

Setting the Volume.............................................11

Using Headphones.............................................12

Using the Speaker Switch...................................12

Reference

Part Names................................................ 14

Listening to the Demonstration Tunes .... 16

Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs .......... 17

Practicing a One-Hand Part Using 50 Preset

Songs (Part Cancel Function) .......................18

A-B Repeat for 50 Preset Songs .........................20

Selecting & Playing Voices........................ 21

Selecting Voices..................................................21

Using the Pedals .................................................21

Adding Variations to the Sound –

[VARIATION] (CLP-130)/[BRILLIANCE]/

[REVERB]/[EFFECT]....................................22

Touch Sensitivity – [TOUCH] ..........................24

Transposition – [TRANSPOSE]........................25

Combining Two Voices (Dual mode)...............26

Splitting the Keyboard Range and Playing Two

Different Voices (Split mode) (CLP-130) ....27

Using the Metronome........................................29

Recording Your Performance ................... 30

Recording to [TRACK1]....................................30

Re-recording TRACK1 ......................................32

Recording to [TRACK2]....................................32

Changing the Initial Settings (Data recorded at

the beginning of a song) ................................34

Playing Back Recorded Songs................... 35

Playing Back a Song ...........................................35

Useful Playback Functions.................................36

Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION]............... 37

Basic Procedure in Function Mode .................. 38

About Each Function......................................... 40

F1. Fine Tuning of the Pitch....................... 40

F2. Selecting a Scale..................................... 41

F3. Dual Mode Functions ........................... 42

F4. (CLP-130) Split Mode Functions ......... 43

F5. (CLP-130) / F4. (CLP-120)

Other Functions.................................... 44

F.6 (CLP-130) / F.5 (CLP-120)

Metronome Volume............................. 45

F7. (CLP-130) / F6. (CLP-120)

Preset Song Part Cancel Volume ......... 45

F8. (CLP-130) / F7. (CLP-120)

MIDI Functions .................................... 45

F9. (CLP-130) / F8. (CLP-120)

Backup Functions ................................. 48

About MIDI................................................ 49

Connections ..............................................50

Connectors......................................................... 50

Connecting a Personal Computer .................... 52

Troubleshooting........................................ 56

Options...................................................... 56

CLP-120: Keyboard Stand Assembly .........57

CLP-130: Keyboard Stand Assembly .........60

Preset Voice List ........................................ 63

Demo Song List ......................................... 66

Index.......................................................... 67

Appendix

Factory Setting List ...................................70

MIDI Data Format .....................................71

MIDI Implementation Chart ..................... 75

Specifications ............................................76

CLP-130/120

Application Index

ENGLISH

Application Index

Use this index to ﬁnd reference pages that may be helpful for your particular application and situation.

Listening

Listening to demo songs with different voices....................................... “Listening to the Demonstration Tunes” on page 16

Listening to songs from “50 Greats for the Piano” ...................................... “Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs” on page 17

Listening to my recorded performance.................................................................“Playing Back Recorded Songs” on page 35

Playing

Using the three performance control pedals.............................................................................. “Using the Pedals” on page 21

Playing an accompaniment that matches pitch ................................................“Transposition – [TRANSPOSE]” on page 25

Selecting a touch sensitivity type......................................................................... “Touch Sensitivity – [TOUCH]” on page 24

Fine tuning the pitch of the entire instrument when you play the Clavinova along

with other instruments or CD music............................................................................. “Fine tuning of the pitch” on page 40

Changing voices

Viewing the list of voices..............................................................................................................“Preset Voice List” on page 63

Simulating a concert hall ..................................................................................................................... “[REVERB]” on page 22

Combining two voices............................................................................... “Combining Two Voices (Dual mode)” on page 26

Playing different sounds with left and right hands

................................ “Splitting the Keyboard Range and Playing Two Different Voices (Split mode) (CLP-130)” on page 27

Making the sound more brilliant or mellower ........................................................................... “[BRILLIANCE]” on page 22

Adding spread or swell to the sound .................................................................................................... “[EFFECT]” on page 23

Enhancing the sound with effects............................................................................... “[VARIATION] (CLP-130)” on page 22

Practicing

Muting the right- or left-hand part

...................................................... “Practicing a One-Hand Part Using 50 Preset Songs (Part Cancel Function)” on page 18

Practicing a speciﬁed phrase repeatedly..............................................................“A-B Repeat for 50 Preset Songs” on page 20

Practicing with an accurate and steady tempo .................................................................“Using the Metronome” on page 29

Practicing using your recorded song..................................................................... “Recording Your Performance” on page 30

Recording

Recording your performance................................................................................. “Recording Your Performance” on page 30

Settings

Adjusting the Clavinova settings ................................................................... “Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION]” on page 37

Connecting the Clavinova to other devices

What is MIDI? ....................................................................................................................................“About MIDI” on page 49

Recording your performance....................................................................................................... “AUX OUT jacks” on page 50

Raising the volume....................................................................................................................... “AUX OUT jacks” on page 50

Outputting other instruments’ sound from the Clavinova............................................................ “AUX IN jacks” on page 51

Connecting a computer ..................................................................................“Connecting a Personal Computer” on page 52

Assembling

Assembling and disassembling the Clavinova ................. “CLP-130/120”: Keyboard Stand Assembly” on pages page 57–62

CLP-130/120

PRECAUTIONS

ENGLISH

(1)B-7

1/2

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even

death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, ﬁre or other hazards. These precautions

include, but are not limited to, the following:

●

Only use the voltage speciﬁed as correct for the instrument. The

required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.

●

Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust

which may have accumulated on it.

●

Use only the supplied power cord/plug.

●

Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters

or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage

the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position

where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it.

●

Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the inter-

nal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no

user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning,

discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualiﬁed

Yamaha service personnel.

●

Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in

damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liq-

uids which might spill into any openings.

●

Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

●

Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.

A burning item may fall over and cause a ﬁre.

●

If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if

there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or

if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by

it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the electric

plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qual-

iﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or

others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited

to, the following:

●

When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an out-

let, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the

cord can damage it.

●

Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is

not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical

storms.

●

Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a

multiple-connector.

Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause

overheating in the outlet.

●

Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the

assembly process.

Failure to assemble the instrument in the proper sequence

might result in damage to the instrument or even injury.

●

Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or

extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater,

or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel dis-

ﬁguration or damage to the internal components.

●

Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo

equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise,

the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise.

●

Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it

might accidentally fall over.

●

Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables.

●

Do not place the instrument against a wall (allow at least 3 cm/

one-inch from the wall), since this can cause inadequate air cir-

culation, and possibly result in the instrument overheating.

Power supply/Power cord

Do not open

Water warning

Fire warning

If you notice any abnormality

Power supply/Power cord

Assembly

Location

CLP-130/120

PRECAUTIONS

ENGLISH

●

Before connecting the instrument to other electronic compo-

nents, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the

power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to mini-

mum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their

minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while

playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.

●

When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry or slightly damp

cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning ﬂuids, or

chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.

●

Take care that the key cover does not pinch your ﬁngers, and do

not insert a ﬁnger or hand in any gaps on the key cover or

instrument.

●

Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the

gaps on the key cover, panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn

off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the

AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualiﬁed

Yamaha service personnel.

●

Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument,

since this might discolor the panel or keyboard.

●

Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instru-

ment, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches

or connectors.

●

Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high

or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent

hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the

ears, consult a physician.

●

Do not place the bench in an unstable position where it might

accidentally fall over.

●

Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a

tool or step-ladder or for any other purpose might result in acci-

dent or injury.

●

Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to

prevent the possibility of accident or injury.

●

If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term

use, tighten them periodically using the included tool.

Saving and backing up your data

●

Depending upon the Backup Settings (page 48), internal data is

retained for about 1 week after the power is turned off. If the

period is exceeded, the data will be lost. Be sure to turn the

power switch on for a few minutes at least once a week. The

data could be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation.

Save important data to external media such as the Yamaha

MDF3 MIDI data ﬁler.

Backing up the external media

●

To protect against data loss through media damage, we recom-

mend that you save your important data onto two external

media.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

Connections

Maintenance

Handling caution

Using the bench (If included)

Saving data

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modiﬁcations to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

(1)B-7

2/2

CLP-130/120

Accessories / Maintenance

ENGLISH

Accessories

• “50 Greats for the Piano” (Music Book)

• Owner’s Manual

This manual contains complete instructions for operating your Clavinova.

• Bench

A bench may be included or optional, depending on your locale.

Maintenance

Clean the instrument using a dry or slightly damp soft cloth (wring well).

CAUTION

Do not use benzene, thinner, detergent, or chemically-treated cloth for cleaning. Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber

products on the instrument.

Otherwise, the panel or keys may become discolored or degraded.

CAUTION

Before using the Clavinova, be sure to read “Precautions” on pages 6 – 7.

Tuning

Unlike an acoustic piano, the Clavinova does not need to be tuned. It always stays perfectly in tune.

Transporting

If you move to another location, you can transport the Clavinova along with your other belongings. You can move the

unit as it is (assembled) or you can disassemble the unit.

Transport the keyboard horizontally. Do not lean it up against a wall or stand it up on its side. Do not subject the

instrument to excessive vibration or shock.

CLP-130/120

Features

ENGLISH

Features

The Yamaha Clavinova CLP-130/120 digital piano offers unmatched sonic realism and natural grand-piano type playabil-

ity as well as Yamaha’s original “AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling (CLP-130)/AWM Stereo Sampling (CLP-120)” tone-

generation technology for rich, musical voices, and a special “Graded Hammer” keyboard that provides graded key

weight and response throughout the keyboard range.

The CLP-130/120 Grand Piano 1 and 2 voices feature totally new samples painstakingly recorded from a full concert

grand piano. The CLP-130 Grand Piano 1 voice features three velocity-switched samples (Dynamic Sampling), special

“Sustain Sampling” (page 88) that samples the unique resonance of an acoustic grand piano’s soundboard and strings

when the damper pedal is pressed, and “Keyoff Samples” that add the subtle sound produced when the keys are released.

The CLP-130/120 comes much closer to the sound of a true acoustic piano.

PEDAL

AUX IN

AUX OUT

L+RRL

LEVEL FIXED

TO HOST HOST SELECT

MIDI

THRU

MIDI

PC-2

Mac

PC-1

OUT IN

PHONES

SPEAKER

NORMAL

OFF

HP. SW

MASTER VOLUME

BRILLIANCE

DEMO METRONOME

TEMPO

FUNCTION

TEMPO

OTHER VALUE

MELLOW BRIGHT

START

STOP

TEMPO

FUNCTION

MIN MAX

–

NO +

YES PRESET

USER 1

USER 2

TRACK

START

STOP

REC

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

E.PIANO

STRINGS

E.PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

VIBRA-

PHONE

CHOIR GUITAR E.BASS SPLIT

ROOM

HALL 1

HALL 2

STAGE

CHORUS

PHASER

TREMOLO

DELAY

HARD

MEDIUM

SOFT

VARIATION

GRAND

PIANO 2

JAZZ

ORGAN

WOOD

BASS

USER 3

VOICE

REVERB EFFECT TOUCH TRANSPOSE

SONG

MASTER VOLUME

BRILLIANCE

DEMO METRONOME

TEMPO

FUNCTION

TEMPO

OTHER VALUE

MELLOW BRIGHT

START

STOP

TEMPO

FUNCTION

MIN MAX

–

NO +

YES PRESET

USER 1

USER 2

TRACK

START

STOP

REC

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

E.PIANO

STRINGS

E.PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

VIBRA-

PHONE

CHOIR GUITAR E.BASS SPLIT

ROOM

HALL 1

HALL 2

STAGE

CHORUS

PHASER

TREMOLO

DELAY

HARD

MEDIUM

SOFT

VARIATION

GRAND

PIANO 2

JAZZ

ORGAN

WOOD

BASS

USER 3

VOICE REVERB EFFECT TOUCH TRANSPOSESONG

POWER

This jack and selector switch allow direct con-

nection to a personal computer for sequencing

and other music applications (pages 52–55).

A set of standard stereo

headphones can be plug-

ged in here for private

practice (page 12).

Delivers the output of the

Clavinova for connection

to an instrument amplifier,

mixing console, PA sys-

tem, or recording equip-

ment (page 51).

[MASTER VOLUME]

Adjust the volume

level using this slider

(page 11).

[METRONOME]

Control the metronome

functions (page 29).

The Clavinova includes 50 preset songs.

This section enables you to listen to these songs, practice

using a convenient practice function, and record and play

back your performance (pages 17–20, 30–36).

TEMPO [▼] [▲]

You can change the song tempo (speed) and select

useful functions using this buttons (pages 37–48).

Voice buttons

Select voices from 14 internal sounds including

Grand Piano 1 and 2 (page 21). You can also

combine two voices at the same time (page 26).

[REVERB] / [EFFECT]

Add reverb (reverberation) and

effects to the sound (pages 22, 23).

[SPLIT]

You can play different voices on the left- and right-hand

sections of the keyboard (CLP-130) (page 27).

[TRANSPOSE]

You can shift the pitch

of the entire keyboard

up or down so that the

pitch will match that of

another instrument or

singer, while you play

the same, unshifted

keys (page 25).

[TOUCH]

Fine-tune the

touch response

(page 24).

[DEMO]

Demonstration play-

back is available for

each voice (page 16).

[BRILLIANCE]

Adjust the brightness of the tone

using this slider (page 22).

Connect a MIDI device here to use

various MIDI functions (pages 45–47).

(About MIDI ➝ page 49)

This switch turns the

internal speakers on

or off (page 12).

(CLP-130)

Connect recording

equipment (such as a

cassette tape recorder)

here to record your per-

formance (page 50).

Connect the

pedal cord here

to use the

Clavinova’s

pedals (page 51).

CLP-130/120

Before Using the Clavinova

ENGLISH

Before Using the Clavinova

Key Cover

To open the key cover:

Lift the cover slightly, then push and slide it open.

To close the key cover:

Slide the cover toward you and gently lower the cover

over the keys.

CAUTION

Hold the cover with both hands when opening or closing it. Do not release it until it is fully opened or closed. Be care-

ful to avoid catching ﬁngers (yours or others, especially children’s) between the cover and main unit.

CAUTION

Do not place objects such as a piece of metal or paper on top of the key cover. Small objects placed on the key cover

may fall inside the unit when the cover is opened and may be nearly impossible to remove. This could cause electric

shock, short circuit, ﬁre or other serious damage to the instrument.

Music Rest

To raise the music rest:

Pull the music rest up and toward yourself as far as it will go.

Flip down the two metal supports at the left and right on

the rear of the music rest.

Lower the music rest so that it rests on the metal supports.

To lower the music rest:

Pull the music rest toward yourself as far as it will go.

Raise the two metal supports (at the rear of the music rest).

Gently lower the music rest backward until it is all the way

down.

CAUTION

Do not try to use the music rest in a half-raised position.

When lowering the music rest, do not release your hands

from the music rest until it is all the way down.

Be careful to avoid catching your fingers

when opening or closing the cover.

CAUTION

CLP-130/120 Before Using the Clavinova

ENGLISH

Turning the Power On

1. Connect the power cord.

Insert the plugs at the ends of the cord, one into the AC INLET on the Clavinova, and the other into a standard AC

outlet.

In some areas, a plug adaptor may be provided to match the pin conﬁguration of the AC wall outlets in your area.

(The shape of plug differs depending on locale.)

2. Turn the power on.

Press the [POWER] button.

• The display located in the center of the front panel and the power indicator located below the left end of the key-

board lights up.

When you’re ready to turn off the power, press the [POWER] button again.

• The display and the power indicator turn off.

Setting the Volume

Initially set the [MASTER VOLUME] control about halfway between the “MIN” and “MAX” settings. Then, when you start

playing, re-adjust the [MASTER VOLUME] control to the most comfortable listening level.

CAUTION

Do not use the Clavinova at a high volume level for a long period of time, or your hearing may be damaged.

TIP

Power indicator

If you close the key cover without turning the power off, the power indicator remains lit, indicating that the

power is still on.

(bottom surface)

Power indicator

[POWER]

Normally indicates tempo.

Display

TERMINOLOGY

MASTER VOLUME:

The volume level of the entire keyboard sound

TIP

You can also adjust the [PHONES] output level and the AUX IN input level using the [MASTER VOLUME] slider.

MASTER VOLUME

MIN MAX

The level decreases. The level increases.

CLP-130/120

Before Using the Clavinova

ENGLISH

Using Headphones

Connect a pair of headphones to one of the

[PHONES]

jacks.

Two

[PHONES]

jacks are provided.

You can connect two sets of standard stereo headphones. (If you are

using only one pair of headphones, you can plug them into either

jack.)

Using the Headphone Hanger

A headphone hanger is included in the CLP-130/120 package so that you can

hang the headphones on the Clavinova. Install the headphone hanger using

included two screws (4

10mm) as shown in the ﬁgure.

CAUTION

Do not hang anything other than the headphones on the hanger. Otherwise,

the Clavinova or the hanger may be damaged.

Using the Speaker Switch

This switch turns the internal speakers on or off.

NORMAL (HP. SW)

......... The speakers produce sound as long as a pair of headphones is not con-

nected.

....................................... The speakers always produce sound.

OFF

...................................... The speakers produce no sound.

PHONES

SPEAKER

NORMAL

OFF

HP. SW

standard stereo

phone plug

bottom surface

PHONES

SPEAKER

NORMAL

OFF

HP. SW

CLP-130/120

ENGLISH

Reference

Part Names................................................................ 14

Listening to the Demonstration Tunes ................... 16

Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs.......................... 17

Practicing a One-Hand Part Using 50 Preset Songs

(Part Cancel Function)............................................ 18

A-B Repeat for 50 Preset Songs .................................. 20

Selecting & Playing Voices ....................................... 21

Selecting Voices ........................................................... 21

Using the Pedals .......................................................... 21

Adding Variations to the Sound – [VARIATION]

(CLP-130)/[BRILLIANCE]/[REVERB]/

[EFFECT]................................................................. 22

Touch Sensitivity – [TOUCH].................................... 24

Transposition – [TRANSPOSE]................................. 25

Combining Two Voices (Dual mode)......................... 26

Splitting the Keyboard Range and Playing Two

Different Voices (Split mode) (CLP-130)............... 27

Using the Metronome................................................. 29

Recording Your Performance................................... 30

Recording to [TRACK1] ............................................. 30

Re-recording TRACK1................................................ 32

Recording to [TRACK2] ............................................. 32

Changing the Initial Settings (Data recorded at the

beginning of a song)................................................ 34

Playing Back Recorded Songs .................................. 35

Playing Back a Song .................................................... 35

Useful Playback Functions.......................................... 36

Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION]........................... 37

Basic Procedure in Function Mode............................ 38

About Each Function.................................................. 40

F1. Fine Tuning of the Pitch ....................................... 40

F2. Selecting a Scale..................................................... 41

F3. Dual Mode Functions ........................................... 42

F4. (CLP-130) Split Mode Functions........................ 43

F5. (CLP-130) / F4. (CLP-120) Other Functions..... 44

F.6

(CLP-130)

/ F.5

(CLP-120)

Metronome Volume .. 45

F7. (CLP-130) / F6. (CLP-120) Preset Song

Part Cancel Volume .............................................. 45

F8. (CLP-130) / F7. (CLP-120) MIDI Functions ..... 45

F9. (CLP-130) / F8. (CLP-120) Backup Functions.. 48

About MIDI.............................................................. 49

Connections ............................................................. 50

Connectors .................................................................. 50

Connecting a Personal Computer .............................. 52

Troubleshooting....................................................... 56

Options..................................................................... 56

CLP-120: Keyboard Stand Assembly....................... 57

CLP-130: Keyboard Stand Assembly....................... 60

Preset Voice List........................................................ 63

Demo Song List........................................................ 66

Index......................................................................... 67

This section explains how to make detailed settings for the

Clavinova’s various functions.

CLP-130/120 Part Names

ENGLISH

Part Names

Top panel (CLP-130)

45 6

C0 D0 E0 F0 G0 A0 B0 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 B1 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 B2 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 A3 B3 C4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 B4

E5 F5 G5 A5 B5 C6 D6 E6 F6 G6 A6 B6 C7

B-1A-1

MASTER VOLUME

BRILLIANCE

DEMO METRONOME

TEMPO

FUNCTION

TEMPO

OTHER VALUE

MELLOW BRIGHT

START

STOP

TEMPO

FUNCTION

MIN MAX

—

NO +

YES PRESET

USER 1

USER 2

TRACK

START

STOP

REC

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

E.PIANO

STRINGS

E.PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

VIBRA-

PHONE

CHOIR GUITAR E.BASS SPLIT

ROOM

HALL 1

HALL 2

STAGE

CHORUS

PHASER

TREMOLO

DELAY

HARD

MEDIUM

SOFT

VARIATION

GRAND

PIANO 2

JAZZ

ORGAN

WOOD

BASS

USER 3

VOICE

REVERB EFFECT TOUCH TRANSPOSE

SONG

PHONES

SPEAKER

NORMAL

OFF

HP. SW

PEDAL

AUX IN

AUX OUT

L+RRL

LEVEL FIXED

TO HOST HOST SELECT

MIDI

THRU

MIDI

PC-2

Mac

PC-1

OUT IN

MASTER VOLUME

BRILLIANCE

DEMO METRONOME

TEMPO

FUNCTION

TEMPO

OTHER VALUE

MELLOW BRIGHT

START

STOP

TEMPO

FUNCTION

MIN MAX

—

NO +

YES PRESET

USER 1

USER 2

TRACK

START

STOP

REC

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

E.PIANO

STRINGS

E.PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

VIBRA-

PHONE

CHOIR GUITAR E.BASS SPLIT

ROOM

HALL 1

HALL 2

STAGE

CHORUS

PHASER

TREMOLO

DELAY

HARD

MEDIUM

SOFT

VARIATION

GRAND

PIANO 2

JAZZ

ORGAN

WOOD

BASS

USER 3

VOICE

REVERB EFFECT TOUCH TRANSPOSE

SONG

POWER

1 [POWER] ....................................... P11

2 [MASTER VOLUME]....................... P11

3 [BRILLIANCE] ................................ P22

4 [DEMO] ........................................ P16

5 METRONOME [START/STOP] ........ P29

6 [TEMPO/FUNCTION #▲▼]..... P29, 38

7 LED display ................................... P15

8 [–/NO] / [+/YES]

[PRESET]

[USER1] [USER2] [USER3] (CLP-130)

[TRACK1] [TRACK2]

SONG [START/STOP]

[REC].......................... P17–20, P30–36

9 Voice buttons................................ P21

0 [SPLIT] (CLP-130).......................... P27

A [REVERB] ....................................... P22

B [EFFECT] ....................................... P23

C [TOUCH]....................................... P24

D [TRANSPOSE]................................ P25

E [PEDAL]......................................... P51

F AUX OUT...................................... P50

G AUX IN ......................................... P51

Connectors

(CLP-130)

CLP-130/120 Part Names

ENGLISH

Top panel (CLP-120)

Display

• Check the operation on the display in the center of the top panel as you proceed.

• The display indicates different values, as shown below, depending on the operation.

45 6

C0 D0 E0 F0 G0 A0 B0 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 B1 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 B2 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 A3 B3 C4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 B4

C5 D5 E5 F5 G5 A5 B5 C6 D6 E6 F6 G6 A6 B6 C7

B-1A-1

MASTER VOLUME

BRILLIANCE

DEMO METRONOME

TEMPO

FUNCTION

TEMPO

OTHER VALUE

MELLOW BRIGHT

START

STOP

TEMPO

FUNCTION

MIN MAX

—

NO +

YES PRESET

TRACK

START

STOP

REC

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN1

CHURCH

ORGAN2

E.PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD1

HARPSI-

CHORD2

VIBRA-

PHONE

CHOIR GUITAR

ROOM

HALL 1

HALL 2

STAGE

CHORUS

PHASER

TREMOLO

DELAY

HARD

MEDIUM

SOFT

GRAND

PIANO 2

JAZZ

ORGAN

STRINGS

REVERB EFFECT TOUCH TRANSPOSE

SONG

PHONES

SPEAKER

NORMAL

OFF

HP. SW

MASTER VOLUME

BRILLIANCE

DEMO METRONOME

TEMPO

FUNCTION

TEMPO

OTHER VALUE

MELLOW BRIGHT

START

STOP

TEMPO

FUNCTION

MIN MAX

—

NO +

YES PRESET

TRACK

START

STOP

REC

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN 1

E.PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD 1

HARPSI-

CHORD 2

VIBRA-

PHONE

CHOIR GUITAR

ROOM

HALL 1

HALL 2

STAGE

CHORUS

PHASER

TREMOLO

DELAY

HARD

MEDIUM

SOFT

GRAND

PIANO 2

CHURCH

ORGAN 2

STRINGS

JAZZ

ORGAN

VOICE

REVERB EFFECT TOUCH TRANSPOSE

SONG

POWER

AUX OUT AUX IN

L+R

LEVEL FIXED

R L

L+RRLR

PEDAL

TO HOST HOST SELECT

MIDI

THRU

MIDIMac

PC-2PC-1

OUT IN

VOICE

Connectors (CLP-120)

H [TO HOST]...............................P49–55

I HOST SELECT...........................P49–55

J MIDI [IN] [OUT] [THRU]...........P49–55

K [SPEAKER] ..................................... P12

L [PHONES] ..................................... P12

M Soft (Left) Pedal ............................ P22

N Sostenute (Center) Pedal............... P22

O Damper (Right) Pedal ................... P21

Tempo

(Normal indication)

A song number of

“50 Greats for the Piano”

Function number Parameter value

CLP-130/120 Listening to the Demonstration Tunes

ENGLISH

Listening to the Demonstration Tunes

Demonstration tunes are provided that effectively demonstrate each of the CLP-130/120’s voices.

1. Turn the power on.

(In case the power is not turned ON) Press the [POWER] button.

When the power is turned ON, one of the voice button LEDs will light.

Initially set the [MASTER VOLUME] control about half way between the “MIN”

and “MAX” settings. Then, when you start playing, re-adjust the [MASTER

VOLUME]

control to the most comfortable listening level.

2. Engage Demo mode.

Press the [DEMO] button to engage Demo mode. The voice button indicators

will ﬂash in sequence.

3. Play a Voice demo.

Press one of the voice buttons to start playback of all songs starting from the

corresponding voice demo tune — featuring the voice normally selected by that

voice button. (If you press the SONG [START/STOP] button instead of a voice

button, the GRAND PIANO 1 demo tune will begin playback.)

Adjust the volume/brilliance

Use the [MASTER VOLUME] control to adjust the volume and the [BRIL-

LIANCE]

control to adjust the brilliance (page 22).

4. Stop the Voice demo.

Press the SONG [START/STOP] button or the voice button of the currently-

playing demo to stop playback.

5. Exit from Demo mode.

Press the [DEMO] button to exit from Demo mode and return to normal play

mode.

The voice button indicators will stop ﬂashing in sequence.

425

MASTER VOLUME

BRILLIANCE

DEMO METRONOME

TEMPO

FUNCTION

TEMPO

OTHER VALUE

MELLOW BRIGHT

START

STOP

TEMPO

FUNCTION

MIN MAX

—

NO +

YES PRESET

USER 1

USER 2

TRACK

START

STOP

REC

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

E.PIANO

STRINGS

E.PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

VIBRA-

PHONE

CHOIR GUITAR E.BASS SPLIT

ROOM

HALL 1

HALL 2

STAGE

CHORUS

PHASER

TREMOLO

DELAY

HARD

MEDIUM

SOFT

VARIATION

GRAND

PIANO 2

JAZZ

ORGAN

WOOD

BASS

USER 3

VOICE

REVERB EFFECT TOUCH TRANSPOSE

SONG

Procedure

TIP

For a list of the demo songs,

see page 66.

NOTE

MIDI reception is not possible in

Demo Song mode.

Demo song data is not transmit-

ted via the MIDI connectors.

NOTE

Demo mode cannot be

engaged while a user song

recorder (page 30) or user song

playback (page 35) is in use.

TERMINOLOGY

Mode:

A mode is a status under which

you can execute a certain func-

tion. In Demo mode, you can

play back demonstration tunes.

NOTE

You cannot adjust the tempo of

demo songs.

You cannot use the part cancel

function (page 45) or the song

A–B repeat function (page 20)

in Demo mode.

NOTE

On the CLP-130, you can demo

the piano voices with various

effects by pressing the [VARIA-

TION] button, then pressing the

desired voice button. Refer to

the “Piano Voice Demo Descrip-

tion” on page 66 for the com-

plete list of demo sounds for the

piano voices with various

effects.

CLP-130/120 Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs

ENGLISH

Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs

The Clavinova provides performance data of 50 piano songs. You can simply listen to these songs

(page 17) or use them for practice (page 18). You can also refer to the included “50 Greats for the

Piano” that contains scores for 50 piano preset songs.

1. Engage Preset Song mode.

Press the [PRESET] button to engage Preset Song mode. The [PRESET],

[TRACK1] and [TRACK2] indicators will light.

2. Play any of the 50 preset songs.

2-1 Press the [–/NO], [+/YES] buttons to select the number

of the tune you want to play (the number will appear

on the LED display).

1 – 50: Select a preset song number and play only

the song.

ALL: Play all preset songs in sequence.

rnd: Play all preset songs continuously in random order.

2-2 Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to start playback.

Adjust the Volume

Use the [MASTER VOLUME] control to adjust the volume.

Adjust the tempo

You can use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION# ▼

▲]

buttons to adjust the playback tempo

as required. The default tempo can be

recalled by simultaneously pressing the

[▼] and [▲] buttons.

3. Stop playback.

Playback will stop automatically when the selected preset song has ﬁnished. To

stop the song during playback (or continuous playback), press the SONG

[START/STOP]

button.

• To play back another song continuously, see procedure 2 above.

-1

223

-2

MASTER VOLUME

BRILLIANCE

DEMO METRONOME

TEMPO

FUNCTION

TEMPO

OTHER VALUE

MELLOW BRIGHT

START

STOP

TEMPO

FUNCTION

MIN MAX

—

NO +

YES PRESET

USER 1

USER 2

TRACK

START

STOP

REC

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

E.PIANO

STRINGS

E.PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

VIBRA-

PHONE

CHOIR GUITAR E.BASS SPLIT

ROOM

HALL 1

HALL 2

STAGE

CHORUS

PHASER

TREMOLO

DELAY

HARD

MEDIUM

SOFT

VARIATION

GRAND

PIANO 2

JAZZ

ORGAN

WOOD

BASS

USER 3

VOICE

REVERB EFFECT TOUCH TRANSPOSE

SONG

Procedure

NOTE

Preset Song mode cannot be

engaged while the unit is in

Demo Song mode (page 16),

while a song is playing back

(page 35), or when the user song

recorder (page 30) is in use.

TERMINOLOGY

Song:

On the CLP-130/120, perfor-

mance data is called a “Song.”

This includes demonstration

tunes and piano preset tunes.

TIP

You can play the keyboard

along with the preset song. You

can change the voice playing on

the keyboard.

TIP

You can adjust the Brilliance

control (page 22) and Reverb

type (page 22) that is applied to

the voice you play on the key-

board and for the preset song

playback. You can change the

Effect type (page 23) and

Touch sensitivity (page 24) for

the keyboard voice.

NOTE

The default tempo “---” is auto-

matically selected whenever a

new preset song is selected, or

when playback of a new preset

song begins during “ALL” or

“rnd” playback.

NOTE

When you select a different song

(or a different song is selected

during chained playback), an

appropriate reverb type will be

selected accordingly.

song number

This produces a relative tempo vari-

ation, with a range from “–50”

through “---” to “50” at maximum;

the range will differ depending on

the selected song.

CLP-130/120 Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs

ENGLISH

4. Exit from Preset Song mode.

Press the [PRESET] button to exit Preset Song mode. The indicator turns off,

and the unit returns to normal play mode.

How to use the practice functions

You can turn the left- and right-hand parts on or off as required so you can practice the

corresponding part (part cancel function) and continuously repeat a speciﬁed phrase

within a song (song A-B repeat function). For more information, see pages 18–20.

Practicing a One-Hand Part Using 50 Preset Songs

(Part Cancel Function)

The 50 preset songs have separate left- and right-hand parts on individual tracks. You can turn the

left- and right-hand parts on or off as required so you can practice the corresponding part (the part

that is turned off) on the keyboard. The right-hand part is played by [TRACK1] and the left-hand

part is played by [TRACK2].

1. Turn off the playback part you wish to practice.

After you select a song to practice, press the [TRACK1] or [TRACK2] button to

turn off the corresponding part.

When you ﬁrst select a song, both [TRACK1] and [TRACK2] indicators light up,

indicating that you can play back both parts. When you press one of the buttons

to turn off playback, the corresponding button indicator turns off and the cor-

responding part playback is muted.

• Pressing the buttons repeatedly toggles playback between on and off.

2. Start playback and playing.

Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to start playback. Play the part you just

turned off.

NOTE

MIDI reception is not possible in

Piano Song mode.

Piano song data is not transmit-

ted via the MIDI connectors.

MASTER VOLUME

BRILLIANCE

DEMO METRONOME

TEMPO

FUNCTION

TEMPO

OTHER VALUE

MELLOW BRIGHT

START

STOP

TEMPO

FUNCTION

MIN MAX

—

NO +

YES PRESET

USER 1

USER 2

TRACK

START

STOP

REC

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

E.PIANO

STRINGS

E.PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

VIBRA-

PHONE

CHOIR GUITAR E.BASS SPLIT

ROOM

HALL 1

HALL 2

STAGE

CHORUS

PHASER

TREMOLO

DELAY

HARD

MEDIUM

SOFT

VARIATION

GRAND

PIANO 2

JAZZ

ORGAN

WOOD

BASS

USER 3

VOICE

REVERB EFFECT TOUCH TRANSPOSE

SONG

Procedure

NOTE

The Preset Song Part Cancel

function cannot be used during

“ALL” or “rnd” (page 17) play-

back.

TIP

The parts can be turned on or

off even during playback.

TIP

The “Preset Song Part Cancel

Volume” function described on

page 45 can be used to set the

canceled part so that it plays at

a volume from “0” (no sound) to

“20”. The normal setting is “5”.

CLP-130/120 Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs

ENGLISH

Starting playback automatically as you start playing the keyboard

(Synchro Start)

When the Synchro Start function is engaged, play

back of the selected preset song will begin automati-

cally as soon as you start playing on the keyboard.

To engage the Synchro Start function press the

SONG [START/STOP]

button while holding the

part button for the ON part. A dot will appear in the

lower right corner of the display.

(Repeat the previous operation to disengage the Synchro Start function.)

Playback will then start as soon as you begin playing on the keyboard.

Left Pedal Start/Stop

The left pedal can be assigned to start and stop preset song playback via the “Left

Pedal Mode” function described on page 44.

Stop playback.

When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova locates the

top of the song. If you wish to stop playback in the middle of a song, press the

SONG[START/STOP]

button.

NOTE

If you hold a track button that is

OFF while pressing the

SONG

[START/STOP]

button, that

track will be turned ON and the

unit will engage Synchro Start

mode.

NOTE

Both parts are automatically

turned ON whenever a new

song is selected.

synchro start mark

song number

CLP-130/120

Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs

ENGLISH

A-B Repeat for 50 Preset Songs

The A-B Repeat function can be used to continuously repeat a speciﬁed phrase within a preset song.

Combined with the Part Cancel function described below, this provides an excellent way to practice

difﬁcult phrases.

Specify the beginning (A) and the end (B) of the

phrase, and start practicing.

Select and play a preset song, then press the

[TEMPO/

FUNCTION#]

button at the beginning of the phrase

you want to repeat.

This sets the “A” point ( will appear on the dis-

play).

To specify the end (B) of the phrase, press the

[TEMPO/

FUNCTION#]

button a second time at the end of the

phrase.

This sets the “B” point ( will appear on the dis-

play).

At this point, repeat playback will begin between the

speciﬁed A and B points.

Stop playback.

Press the

SONG [START/STOP]

button to stop playback while retaining the

speciﬁed A and B points. A-B repeat playback will resume if you press the

SONG

[START/STOP]

button again.

To cancel the A and B points, press the

[TEMPO/FUNCTION#]

button once.

MASTER VOLUME

BRILLIANCE

DEMO METRONOME

TEMPO

FUNCTION

TEMPO

OTHER VALUE

MELLOW BRIGHT

START

STOP

TEMPO

FUNCTION

MIN MAX

—

NO +

YES PRESET

USER 1

USER 2

TRACK

START

STOP

REC

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

E.PIANO

STRINGS

E.PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

VIBRA-

PHONE

CHOIR GUITAR E.BASS SPLIT

ROOM

HALL 1

HALL 2

STAGE

CHORUS

PHASER

TREMOLO

DELAY

HARD

MEDIUM

SOFT

VARIATION

GRAND

PIANO 2

JAZZ

ORGAN

WOOD

BASS

USER 3

VOICE

REVERB EFFECT TOUCH TRANSPOSE

SONG

Procedure

NOTE

The A-B Repeat function cannot

be used during “ALL” or “rnd”

(page 17) playback.

NOTE

• To set the “A” point at the

very beginning of the song,

press the

[TEMPO/FUNC-

TION#]

button before start-

ing playback.

• To set the B point at the

song’s end, press the

[TEMPO/FUNCTION#]

but-

ton after song playback is

complete and before

disappears from the display.

TIP

An automatic lead-in (to help

guide you into the phrase)

starts at the A point of the song.

However, when the A point is

set at the beginning of the song,

the automatic lead-in is not

played.

NOTE

The A and B points are auto-

matically canceled when a new

song is selected.

CLP-130/120

Selecting & Playing Voices

ENGLISH

Selecting & Playing Voices

Selecting Voices

Select the desired voice by pressing one of the

[VOICE]

buttons.

Then, when you start playing, re-adjust the

[MASTER VOLUME]

control for the most

comfortable listening level.

Using the Pedals

The Clavinova has three foot pedals that produce a range

of expressive effects similar to those produced by the

pedals on an acoustic piano.

Damper (Right) Pedal

The damper pedal functions in the same way as a

damper pedal on an acoustic piano. When the damper

pedal is pressed, notes sustain longer. Releasing the pedal

immediately stops (damps) any sustained notes.

When you select the

GRAND PIANO 1

voice on the CLP-

130, pressing the damper pedal activates the instrument’s

special “Sustain Samples” to accurately recreate the

unique resonance of an acoustic grand piano’s sound-

board and strings.

Voice buttons

MASTER VOLUME

BRILLIANCE

DEMO METRONOME

TEMPO

FUNCTION

TEMPO

OTHER VALUE

MELLOW BRIGHT

START

STOP

TEMPO

FUNCTION

MIN MAX

—

NO +

YES PRESET

USER 1

USER 2

TRACK

START

STOP

REC

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

E.PIANO

STRINGS

E.PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

VIBRA-

PHONE

CHOIR GUITAR E.BASS SPLIT

ROOM

HALL 1

HALL 2

STAGE

CHORUS

PHASER

TREMOLO

DELAY

HARD

MEDIUM

SOFT

VARIATION

GRAND

PIANO 2

JAZZ

ORGAN

WOOD

BASS

USER 3

VOICE

REVERB EFFECT TOUCH TRANSPOSE

SONG

Procedure

TIP

To learn characteristics of the

voices, listen to demo songs for

each voice (page 16). Refer to

“Preset Voice List” on page 63

for more information on the

characteristics of each preset

voice.

TERMINOLOGY

Voice:

On the Clavinova, a voice

means a “tone” or “tonal color.”

TIP

You can control the loudness of

a voice by adjusting the force

with which you strike the keys,

although different playing styles

(touch sensitivities) have little or

no effect with certain musical

instruments.

Refer to “Preset Voice List” on

page 63.

NOTE

If the damper pedal doesn’t

work, make sure that the pedal

cord is properly plugged into the

main unit (page 61: CLP-130,

page 58: CLP-120).

TIP

The depth of the effect pro-

duced by the “Sustain Samples”

can be adjusted via the “Pedal

Functions” (page 44) in Func-

tion mode.















When you press the damper

pedal here, the notes you

play before you release the

pedal have a longer sustain.

CLP-130/120

Selecting & Playing Voices

ENGLISH

Sostenuto (Center) Pedal

If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the

sostenuto pedal while the note(s) are held, those notes

will sustain as long as you hold the pedal (as if the

damper pedal had been pressed) but all subsequently

played notes will not be sustained. This makes it possible

to sustain a chord, for example, while other notes are

played “staccato.”

Soft (Left) Pedal

The soft pedal reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes played while

the pedal is pressed. The soft pedal will not affect notes that are already playing when it

is pressed.

Adding Variations to the Sound – [VARIATION]

(CLP-130)/[BRILLIANCE]/[REVERB]/[EFFECT]

[VARIATION] (CLP-130)

Lets you alter another aspect of the effect, depending on the selected type.

Refer to “Preset Voice List” on page 63 for more information on the characteristics of

each variation.

Pressing the

[VARIATION]

or selected voice button toggles the variation on and off.

The indicator lights (ON) each time the

[VARIATION]

button is pressed.

[BRILLIANCE]

This control can be used to change the tonality or “timbre” of the sound output.

The control range is from MELLOW to BRIGHT.

[REVERB]

This control enables you to select various digital reverb effects that would add extra

depth and expression to the sound to create a realistic acoustic ambience.

OFF:

When no reverb effect is selected, no REVERB indicator is lit.

ROOM:

This setting adds a continuous reverb effect to the sound, similar to the

acoustic reverberation you would hear in a room.

HALL 1:

For a “bigger” reverb sound, use the HALL 1 setting. This effect simulates

the natural reverberation of a small-size concert hall.

HALL 2: For a truly spacious reverb sound, use the HALL 2 setting. This effect simu-

lates the natural reverberation of a large concert hall.

STAGE: Simulates the reverb of a stage environment.

TIP

Organ, string and choir voices

will continue to sound for as

long as the sostenuto pedal is

depressed.















When you press the sostenu-

to pedal here while holding

the note, the note will sustain

as long as you hold the pedal.

TIP

The left pedal can be assigned

to song start/stop operation or

variation function (CLP-130) via

the “Left Pedal Mode” described

on page 44.

[BRILLIANCE]

[—/NO] [+/YES]

[EFFECT][REVERB][VARIATION]

MASTER VOLUME

BRILLIANCE

DEMO METRONOME

TEMPO

FUNCTION

TEMPO

OTHER VALUE

MELLOW BRIGHT

START

STOP

TEMPO

FUNCTION

MIN MAX

—

NO +

YES PRESET

USER 1

USER 2

TRACK

START

STOP

REC

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

E.PIANO

STRINGS

E.PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

VIBRA-

PHONE

CHOIR GUITAR E.BASS SPLIT

ROOM

HALL 1

HALL 2

STAGE

CHORUS

PHASER

TREMOLO

DELAY

HARD

MEDIUM

SOFT

VARIATION

GRAND

PIANO 2

JAZZ

ORGAN

WOOD

BASS

USER 3

VOICE

REVERB EFFECT TOUCH TRANSPOSE

SONG

TIP

Normal setting = OFF

TERMINOLOGY

Normal setting:

The “Normal setting” refers to

the default setting (factory set-

ting) obtained when you ﬁrst

turn on the power to the Clavi-

nova.

TIP

The left pedal can be assigned

to ON or OFF the variation via

the “Left Pedal Mode” function

described on page 44 (CLP-

130).

NOTE

When the BRILLIANCE is set to

BRIGHT, the overall sound will

be slightly louder. If the MAS-

TER VOLUME is set at a high

level the sound may become

distorted. If so, lower the MAS-

TER VOLUME level.

TIP

The default reverb type (includ-

ing OFF) and depth settings are

different for each voice.

Procedure

CLP-130/120 Selecting & Playing Voices

ENGLISH

Pressing the [REVERB] button repeatedly toggles the reverb on and off.

The indicators light in sequence each time the [REVERB] button is pressed. No effect is

produced when all indicators are off.

Even if the REVERB effect is OFF, a “Soundboard Reverb” effect will be applied when

the GRAND PIANO 1 voice is selected.

Adjusting Reverb Depth

Adjust the reverb depth for the selected voice by using the

[–/NO] [+/YES] buttons while holding the [REVERB] but-

ton. The depth range is from 0 through 20. The current

depth setting appears on the LED display while the

[REVERB] button is held.

[EFFECT]

The [EFFECT] button allows you to select an effect to give your

sound greater depth and animation.

OFF: When no effect is selected, no EFFECT indicator is lit.

CHORUS: A shimmering, broadening effect

PHASER: Adds a sweeping effect to the sound.

TREMOLO: Tremolo effect

DELAY: Echo effect

To select an effect type press the [EFFECT] button a few times until the indicator corre-

sponding to the desired type lights (the indicators light in sequence each time you press

the [EFFECT] button). No effect is produced when all indicators are off.

Adjusting Effect Depth

You can adjust the effect depth for the selected voice by

using the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons while holding the

[EFFECT] button.

The depth range is from 0 through 20. The current depth

setting appears on the LED display while the [EFFECT]

button is held.

Procedure

TIP

Releasing the [REVERB] but-

ton changes the reverb type.

If you are changing the reverb

depth by holding the [REVERB]

button, pressing the [REVERB]

button will not change the

reverb type.

TIP

depth 0: no effect

depth 20: maximum reverb

depth

TIP

Default depth settings are differ-

ent for each voice.

TIP

The default effect type (includ-

ing OFF) and depth settings are

different for each voice.

Procedure

depth

TIP

Releasing the [EFFECT] button

changes the effect type.

If you are changing the depth

settings by holding the

[EFFECT] button, pressing the

[EFFECT] button will not

change the effect type.

TIP

depth 0: no effect

depth 20: maximum effect

depth

TIP

Default depth settings are differ-

ent for each voice.

depth

CLP-130/120 Selecting & Playing Voices

ENGLISH

Touch Sensitivity – [TOUCH]

You can select four different types of keyboard touch sensitivity — HARD, MEDIUM, SOFT or FIXED

— to match different playing styles and preferences.

HARD: Requires that the keys be played quite hard to produce maximum loud-

ness.

MEDIUM: Produces a fairly “standard” keyboard response.

SOFT: Allows maximum loudness to be produced with relatively light key pres-

sure.

FIXED: All notes are produced at the same volume no matter how hard the key-

board is played.

You can adjust the volume.

To select a touch sensitivity type press the [TOUCH] button a few times until the indica-

tor corresponding to the desired type lights (the indicators light in sequence each time

the

[TOUCH] button is pressed). No indicator is lit when “FIXED” is selected.

Changing the volume when FIXED is selected

When you select FIXED, you can set the volume for notes

played in FIXED mode by using the [–/NO] and [+/YES] but-

tons while you hold the [TOUCH] button. The current vol-

ume level appears on the display. The volume range is from 1

through 127. The default setting is 64.

TIP

This setting does not change

the weight of the keyboard.

TIP

Normal setting = MEDIUM

TIP

The touch sensitivity type will

become the common setting for

all voices. However, the touch

sensitivity settings may have lit-

tle or no effect with certain

voices that are not normally

responsive to keyboard dynam-

ics. (Refer to the “Preset Voice

List” on page 63.)

[TOUCH]

[—/NO] [+/YES]

MASTER VOLUME

BRILLIANCE

DEMO METRONOME

TEMPO

FUNCTION

TEMPO

OTHER VALUE

MELLOW BRIGHT

START

STOP

TEMPO

FUNCTION

MIN MAX

—

NO +

YES PRESET

USER 1

USER 2

TRACK

START

STOP

REC

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

E.PIANO

STRINGS

E.PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

VIBRA-

PHONE

CHOIR GUITAR E.BASS SPLIT

ROOM

HALL 1

HALL 2

STAGE

CHORUS

PHASER

TREMOLO

DELAY

HARD

MEDIUM

SOFT

VARIATION

GRAND

PIANO 2

JAZZ

ORGAN

WOOD

BASS

USER 3

VOICE

REVERB EFFECT TOUCH TRANSPOSE

SONG

Procedure

TIP

1: minimum volume

127: maximum volume

TIP

The touch volume set in FIXED

mode will become the common

setting for all voices.

TIP

Releasing the [TOUCH] button

changes the touch type.

If you are changing the volume

by holding the [TOUCH] button,

pressing the [TOUCH] button

will not change the touch sensi-

tivity type. (FIXED mode will

remain selected.)

volume range

CLP-130/120 Selecting & Playing Voices

ENGLISH

Transposition – [TRANSPOSE]

The Clavinova’s Transpose function makes it possible to shift the pitch of the entire keyboard up or

down in semitone intervals to facilitate playing in difﬁcult key signatures, and to let you easily

match the pitch of the keyboard to the range of a singer or other instruments. For example, if you

set the transposition amount to “5,” playing key C produces pitch F. In this way, you can play a

song as though it were in C major, and the Clavinova will transpose it to the key of F.

Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] button while holding the

[TRANSPOSE]

button to transpose down or up as required.

The amount of transposition appears on the LED display

while the [TRANSPOSE] button is held. The default transpose

setting is “0”.

The [TRANSPOSE] button indicator remains lit when a transpose setting other than

“0” is selected. Every time the [TRANSPOSE] button is pressed after that switches the

transpose function ON or OFF.

[TRANSPOSE]

[—/NO] [+/YES]

MASTER VOLUME

BRILLIANCE

DEMO METRONOME

TEMPO

FUNCTION

TEMPO

OTHER VALUE

MELLOW BRIGHT

START

STOP

TEMPO

FUNCTION

MIN MAX

—

NO +

YES PRESET

USER 1

USER 2

TRACK

START

STOP

REC

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

E.PIANO

STRINGS

E.PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

VIBRA-

PHONE

CHOIR GUITAR E.BASS SPLIT

ROOM

HALL 1

HALL 2

STAGE

CHORUS

PHASER

TREMOLO

DELAY

HARD

MEDIUM

SOFT

VARIATION

GRAND

PIANO 2

JAZZ

ORGAN

WOOD

BASS

USER 3

VOICE

REVERB EFFECT TOUCH TRANSPOSE

SONG

Procedure

TERMINOLOGY

Transpose:

Changing the key signature of a

song. On the Clavinova, trans-

posing shifts the pitch of the

entire keyboard.

TIP

The transposition range:

–12: –12 semitones

(down one octave)

0: normal pitch

12: 12 semitones

(up one octave)

TIP

Notes below and above the A-1

…. C7 range of the CLP-130/

120 sound one octave higher

and lower, respectively.

transposition

CLP-130/120 Selecting & Playing Voices

ENGLISH

Combining Two Voices (Dual mode)

You can play two voices simultaneously across the entire range of the keyboard. In this way, you

can simulate a melody duet or combine two similar voices to create a thicker sound.

1. Engage Dual mode.

Press two voice buttons at the same time (or press one voice button while hold-

ing another). The voice indicators of both selected voices will light when Dual

mode is active.

• According to the voice numbering

priority shown in the diagram on

the right, the lower value voice

number will be designated as Voice

1 (the other voice will be desig-

nated as Voice 2).

The CLP-130/120 Function mode provides access to a number of other Dual

mode functions, such as volume balance setting or octave setting (page 42). (If

you do not set Dual mode functions, the appropriate setting will be set in each

voice by default.)

2. Exit Dual mode and return to normal play mode.

To return to the normal single-voice play mode, press any single voice button.

MASTER VOLUME

BRILLIANCE

DEMO METRONOME

TEMPO

FUNCTION

TEMPO

OTHER VALUE

MELLOW BRIGHT

START

STOP

TEMPO

FUNCTION

MIN MAX

—

NO +

YES PRESET

USER 1

USER 2

TRACK

START

STOP

REC

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

E.PIANO

STRINGS

E.PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

VIBRA-

PHONE

CHOIR GUITAR E.BASS SPLIT

ROOM

HALL 1

HALL 2

STAGE

CHORUS

PHASER

TREMOLO

DELAY

HARD

MEDIUM

SOFT

VARIATION

GRAND

PIANO 2

JAZZ

ORGAN

WOOD

BASS

USER 3

VOICE

REVERB EFFECT TOUCH TRANSPOSE

SONG

Procedure

NOTE (CLP-130)

Dual and Split (page 27) modes

cannot be engaged at the same

time.

TIP

[VARIATION] in Dual Mode

(CLP-130)

The [VARIATION] button’s indi-

cator will light if the variation is

engaged for either or both of the

Dual mode voices. While Dual

mode is engaged, the [VARIA-

TION] button can be used to

turn the variation for both voices

on or off.

To turn the variation on or off for

only one of the voices, hold the

voice button for the other voice

and press the button of the voice

for which you want to change

the variation.

TIP

[REVERB] in Dual Mode

The reverb type assigned to

Voice 1 will take priority over the

other. (If the reverb is set to OFF,

Voice 2 reverb type will be in

effect.) Reverb depth setting via

the panel controls (i.e., pressing

the [–/NO] or [+/YES] buttons

while holding the [REVERB] but-

ton — see page 22) will be

applied only to Voice 1.

TIP

[EFFECT] in Dual Mode

Depending on the conditions,

one effect type may take priority

over the other. Depth will be

decided according to the depth

default value of the voice combi-

nation. However, using function

F3 (page 42) you can adjust the

depth value for each voice to

your liking.

Effect depth setting via the panel

controls (i.e., pressing the [–/

NO] or [+/YES] buttons while

holding the [EFFECT] button —

see page 23) will be applied only

to Voice 1.

12 13 14

34567

8 9 10 11

Voice numbering priority

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

E.PIANO

STRINGS

E.PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

VIBRA-

PHONE

CHOIR GUITAR E.BASS

GRAND

PIANO 2

JAZZ

ORGAN

WOOD

BASS

VOICE

CLP-130/120 Selecting & Playing Voices

ENGLISH

Splitting the Keyboard Range and Playing Two Dif-

ferent Voices (Split mode) (CLP-130)

Split mode enables you to play two different voices on the keyboard — one with the left hand and

another with the right hand. For example, you can play a bass part using the Wood Bass or Electric

Bass voice with the left hand, and a melody with the right hand.

1. Engage Split mode.

Press the [SPLIT] button so that its indicator lights. The default setting (WOOD

BASE)

will be selected for the left-hand voice at ﬁrst.

The Function mode provides access to a number of other Split mode functions

(page 43). (If you make no settings for Split mode functions, the appropriate

setting will be set in each voice by default.)

2. Specify the split point (the border between the

right-and left-hand range).

You can change the split point to any other key by pressing the key while hold-

ing the [SPLIT] button (the name of the current split-point key appears on the

LED display while the [SPLIT] button is held).

The split point is initially set at the F



2 key by default.

If you do not need to change the split point, skip this procedure.

Voice buttons

[SPLIT]

MASTER VOLUME

BRILLIANCE

DEMO METRONOME

TEMPO

FUNCTION

TEMPO

OTHER VALUE

MELLOW BRIGHT

START

STOP

TEMPO

FUNCTION

MIN MAX

—

NO +

YES PRESET

USER 1

USER 2

TRACK

START

STOP

REC

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

E.PIANO

STRINGS

E.PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

VIBRA-

PHONE

CHOIR GUITAR E.BASS SPLIT

ROOM

HALL 1

HALL 2

STAGE

CHORUS

PHASER

TREMOLO

DELAY

HARD

MEDIUM

SOFT

VARIATION

GRAND

PIANO 2

JAZZ

ORGAN

WOOD

BASS

USER 3

VOICE

REVERB EFFECT TOUCH TRANSPOSE

SONG

Procedure

NOTE

Dual (page 26) and Split

(page 26) modes cannot be

engaged simultaneously.

TIP

A speciﬁed “split point” key is

included in the left-hand range.

TIP

The split point can also be set

via Function 4 (page 43).

An example of split-point key display

followed by a high bar if sharp

(G2) (A 2)

followed by a low bar if flat

CLP-130/120 Selecting & Playing Voices

ENGLISH

3. Select a voice for the right hand.

Press a voice button.

4. Select a voice for the left hand.

Press the corresponding voice button while holding the [SPLIT] button. (The

indicator of the Left Voice button will light while the

[SPLIT] button is pressed.)

To turn the variation on or off for the split voice, hold the [SPLIT] button and

press the

[VARIATION] button or the currently-selected voice button.

5. Exit Split mode and return to normal play mode.

Press the [SPLIT] button again so that its indicator goes out.

TIP

[VARIATION] in Split Mode

You can turn the variation on or

off for Split mode voices. Nor-

mally, the voice indicator of the

right voice lights in Split mode.

The [VARIATION] can be used

to turn the variation for the right

voice on or off as required.

While the [SPLIT] button is

held, however, the voice indica-

tor of the left voice lights. In this

state the [VARIATION] button

turns the variation for the left

voice on or off.

TIP

[REVERB] in Split Mode

The reverb type assigned to the

right voice will take priority over

the other. (If the reverb is set to

OFF, the left voice’s reverb type

will be in effect.) Reverb depth

setting via the panel controls

(i.e. pressing the [–/NO] or [+/

YES] buttons while holding the

[REVERB] button — see

page 22) will be applied to the

right voice only.

TIP

[EFFECT] in Split Mode

Depending on the conditions,

one effect type will take priority

over the other. The depth will be

decided according to the depth

default value of the voice combi-

nation. However, using function

F4 (page 43) you can change

the depth value for each voice

as you like. Effect depth setting

via the panel controls (i.e.

pressing the [–/NO] or [+/YES]

buttons while holding the

[EFFECT] button — see

page 23) will be applied to the

right voice only.

CLP-130/120 Selecting & Playing Voices

ENGLISH

Using the Metronome

The Clavinova features a built-in metronome (a device that keeps an accurate tempo) that is conve-

nient for practicing.

1. Start the metronome.

The metronome sound is turned on by pressing

the METRONOME [START/STOP] button.

Adjusting the tempo

The tempo of the metronome and user song recorder playback (the recorder is

described in the next section) can be set from 32 to 280 beats per minute by

using the [TEMPO/FUNCTION# ▼, ▲] buttons (when the [TEMPO/FUNC-

TION# ▼, ▲]

button’s [TEMPO] indicator is lit).

Adjusting the time signature

The time signature (beat) of the metronome can be

set by using the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons while

holding the METRONOME [START/STOP] button.

You can set the beat to 0, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6. The current

setting appears on the LED display while you are

holding the METRONOME [START/STOP] button.

2. Stop the metronome.

Turn off the metronome by pressing the METRONOME [START/STOP] button.

[TEMPO/FUNCTION# ▲▼]

[—/NO] [+/YES]

MASTER VOLUME

BRILLIANCE

DEMO METRONOME

TEMPO

FUNCTION

TEMPO

OTHER VALUE

MELLOW BRIGHT

START

STOP

TEMPO

FUNCTION

MIN MAX

—

NO +

YES PRESET

USER 1

USER 2

TRACK

START

STOP

REC

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

E.PIANO

STRINGS

E.PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

VIBRA-

PHONE

CHOIR GUITAR E.BASS SPLIT

ROOM

HALL 1

HALL 2

STAGE

CHORUS

PHASER

TREMOLO

DELAY

HARD

MEDIUM

SOFT

VARIATION

GRAND

PIANO 2

JAZZ

ORGAN

WOOD

BASS

USER 3

VOICE

REVERB EFFECT TOUCH TRANSPOSE

SONG

Procedure

The beat indicator flashes

at the current tempo.

TIP

If the [TEMPO/FUNCTION#]

button’s [FUNCTION#] indicator

is lit, press the [TEMPO/FUNC-

TION#] button to light the

[TEMPO] indicator.

TIP

The volume of the metronome

can be adjusted via the Metro-

nome Volume function in Func-

tion mode (page 45).

beat

CLP-130/120

Recording Your Performance

ENGLISH

Recording Your Performance

The ability to record and play back what you’ve played on the CLP-

130/120 keyboard can be an effective practice aid. You can, for exam-

ple, record just the left-hand part, and then practice the right-hand

part while playing back the recorded left-hand part. Or, since you can

record up to two tracks separately, you could record the left- and right-

hand parts separately, or record both parts of a duet and hear how they

sound when played back. The CLP-130/120’s two-track Song Recorder

allows the recording of up to three User Songs (one User Song on the

CLP-120).

Recording to [TRACK1]

CAUTION

Notes on recording

All user song recorder data will be retained in memory for about one week after the

power is turned off. If you want to keep your recorded data for longer periods of time,

turn the power on for a few minutes at least once a week.

It is also possible to store the data to an external MIDI storage device such as the

Yamaha MIDI Data Filer MDF3 by using the Bulk Data Dump function described on

page 47.

Select a song for recording. (CLP-130)

Press the

[USER 1/2/3]

button to select a song for recording.

The indicator of the selected song will light. (No song is selected if none of the

indicators are lit.)

Make all the initial settings.

Before you begin to record, select the voice you want to record (or voices if you

will be using Dual or Split mode). Make any other desired settings (tempo,

reverb, etc.) as well. You might also want to set the volume.

You can also adjust the playback volume using

[MASTER VOLUME]

TIP

You can record your perfor-

mance (audio data) to a cas-

sette tape recorder or other

recording device via the AUX

OUT connector (page 50).

TERMINOLOGY

Recording vs. Saving:

The format of performance data

recorded on a cassette tape dif-

fers from that of data recorded

on the Clavinova. A cassette

tape records audio signals. The

Clavinova “saves” information

regarding note timing, voices,

and a tempo value, but not

audio signals. When you play

back recorded songs, the Clavi-

nova produces sound based on

the saved information. There-

fore, recording on the Clavinova

may be more accurately called

“saving information.” However,

this book often uses the word

“recording” because it seems to

make more sense.

541673

MASTER VOLUME

BRILLIANCE

DEMO METRONOME

TEMPO

FUNCTION

TEMPO

OTHER VALUE

MELLOW BRIGHT

START

STOP

TEMPO

FUNCTION

MIN MAX

—

NO +

YES PRESET

USER 1

USER 2

TRACK

START

STOP

REC

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

E.PIANO

STRINGS

E.PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

VIBRA-

PHONE

CHOIR GUITAR E.BASS SPLIT

ROOM

HALL 1

HALL 2

STAGE

CHORUS

PHASER

TREMOLO

DELAY

HARD

MEDIUM

SOFT

VARIATION

GRAND

PIANO 2

JAZZ

ORGAN

WOOD

BASS

USER 3

VOICE

REVERB EFFECT TOUCH TRANSPOSE

SONG

NOTE (CLP-130)

When the unit is in Demo Song

mode, the

[USER 1/2/3]

button

cannot be used to select a song.

NOTE

When the unit is in Demo Song

or Preset Song mode, Record

mode cannot be engaged.

NOTE

To avoid erasing data from

the track:

CLP-130

If the track contains data, the

track indicator lights up green

when you press the

[USER1/2/

button. Note that recording

new data on this track will erase

the existing data.

CLP-120

Press the

[TRACK1/2]

button. If

the indicator lights up green, the

track already contains data.

Note that the existing data will

be erased if you record new

data on the track.

Procedure

CLP-130/120 Recording Your Performance

ENGLISH

3. Engage Record Ready mode.

Press the [REC] button to engage Record Ready

mode. Recording does not actually start yet.

The

[TRACK1] or the [TRACK2] indicator ﬂashes in

red.

The amount of memory available for recording will

be shown on the LED display in approximate kilo-

bytes, and the right-most dot on the LED display

will ﬂash at the current METRONOME tempo setting.

Record Ready mode can be disengaged before recording by pressing the

[REC]

button a second time.

4. Select the record track.

When Record mode is engaged in the previous step, the last-recorded track will

automatically be selected for recording and its indicator — i.e. the [TRACK1] or

[TRACK2] button indicator — will glow red. If you want to record on a different

track, press the appropriate track button so that its indicator glows red.

5. Start recording.

Recording will begin automatically as soon as you play a note on the keyboard

or press the SONG [START/STOP] button. The current measure number will

appear on the display while recording.

6. Stop recording.

Press either the [REC] or SONG [START/STOP] button to stop recording.

The indicator of the recorded track will glow green to indicate that it now con-

tains data. (Record mode is disengaged automatically.)

7. Play back the recorded performance.

Press the SONG[START/STOP] button to play back the recorded performance.

To stop playback in the middle of a song, press the SONG[START/STOP] but-

ton.

NOTE

The amount of memory avail-

able for recording:

This value in KiloBytes (a unit

used of measurement for data)

indicates how much space

remains available for recording

on the Clavinova. You can

record up to a maximum of

about 9,400 notes on the CLP-

130/120 depending on pedal

usage and other factors.

TIP (CLP-130)

If a user song ([USER 1/2/3]) is

not selected (the lamp is not lit),

pressing the [REC] button will

result in the [USER 1] song’s

[TRACK1] being selected and

Record Ready mode engaged.

At this time, [TRACK2] play-

back will be turned off if the

track contains data.

TIP

If the metronome was on when

you started recording, you’ll be

able to keep time with the met-

ronome while recording, but the

metronome sound will not be

recorded.

TIP

For more recording information,

see page 33.

TIP

The left pedal can be assigned

to start and stop recording via

the “Left Pedal Mode” function

described on page 44.

NOTE

The record track indicator will

begin to ﬂash when the recorder

memory is almost full. If the

memory becomes full during

recording, “FUL” will appear on

the display and recording will

stop automatically. (All recorded

data up to that point will be

retained.)

NOTE

Pressing the SONG [START/

STOP] button to start recording,

then pressing it again to stop

recording will erase all previ-

ously-recorded data on the

selected track.

flash

CLP-130/120 Recording Your Performance

ENGLISH

Re-recording TRACK1

This section explains how to record again in case your performance was not satisfactory.

1. Select a voice or voices (and other settings) for recording, if necessary.

Repeat Step 1 on page 30 if you wish to change the previous settings.

2. Re-engage Record Ready mode.

Press the [REC] button, again.

The selected track’s indicator ﬂashes in red.

Follow the procedure from Step 5 on page 31 to re-record.

Recording to [TRACK2]

This section explains how to record another part on the second track.

1. Select a voice or voices (and other settings) for the recording.

Select a voice (or voices) for recording. Select other settings, if necessary.

2. Re-engage Record Ready mode.

Press the [REC] button again.

The selected track’s indicator ﬂashes in red.

3. Select a recording track.

Select a track that you have not already used for recording. The selected track’s indi-

cator lights up red. (The indicator of a track that contains previously-recorded data

will glow green.)

You can record new sounds and notes on each pass while listening to the recorded

track.

Follow the procedure from Step 5 on page 31 to record.

TIP

If you want to change the

tempo, time signature, reverb

type, or effect type when re-

recording a track or when

recording to another track, do

so after you engage Record

Ready mode (step 3).

NOTE

You cannot re-record in the mid-

dle of a song.

TIP

If you want to change the

tempo, time signature, reverb

type, or effect type when re-

recording a track or when

recording to another track, do

so after entering Record Ready

mode (step 3).

NOTE

If you don’t want to hear the

previously-recorded track while

you record (for example, when

you want to record a song differ-

ent from what you recorded on

the previous track), press the

playback track button before

pressing the [REC] button (step

2, above) so that its indicator is

turned off.

CLP-130/120 Recording Your Performance

ENGLISH

The user song recorder records the following data:

Data in addition to the notes and voices you play is recorded.

This data includes “Individual Tracks” and “Entire Song.” See below.

Individual Tracks

• Notes played

• Voice selection

• [VARIATION] ON/OFF (CLP-130)

• Pedal (Damper/Soft/Sostenuto)

• [REVERB] depth

• [EFFECT] depth

• Dual mode voices

• Dual balance (F3)

• Dual detune (F3)

• Dual octave shift (F3)

• Split mode voices (CLP-130)

• Split balance (F4: CLP-130)

• Split octave shift (F4:CLP-130)

Entire Song

•Tempo

• Time signature (beat)

• [REVERB] type (including OFF)

• [EFFECT] type (including OFF)

CLP-130/120 Recording Your Performance

ENGLISH

Changing the Initial Settings (Data recorded at the

beginning of a song)

The initial settings (data recorded at the beginning of a song) can be changed after the recording.

For example, after recording, you can change the voice to create a different ambience or adjust the

song tempo to your taste.

You can change the following initial settings.

Individual Tracks

• Voice selection

• [VARIATION] ON/OFF (CLP-130)

• [REVERB] depth

• [EFFECT] depth

• Dual mode voices

• Split mode voices (CLP-130)

Entire Song

•Tempo

• Time signature (beat)

• [REVERB] type (including OFF)

• [EFFECT] type (including OFF)

1. Engage Record mode and select a track to change the initial settings.

The indicator glows red. (Data shared by two tracks can be changed via either track.)

2. Change the settings via the panel controls.

For example, if you wish to change the recorded voice from [E. PIANO 1] to

[E. PIANO 2], press the [E. PIANO 2] button.

Be careful not to press the SONG [START/STOP] button or a key on the keyboard,

either of which will start recording and erase all previously-recorded data on the

selected track.

3. Press the [REC] button to exit Record mode.

Be careful not to press the SONG [START/STOP] button or a key on the keyboard,

either of which will start recording and erase all previously-recorded data on the

selected track.

NOTE

You can cancel changes made

to the initial settings by select-

ing a different track after Step 2,

then exiting Record mode dur-

ing Step 3 without pressing the

[REC] button. (Changes made

to the data shared by two tracks

are also canceled.)

CLP-130/120 Playing Back Recorded Songs

ENGLISH

Playing Back Recorded Songs

You can play back songs recorded using the Record function

(pages 30–34). You can also play the keyboard along with the play-

back.

Playing Back a Song

1. Select the desired song. (CLP-130)

Press the [USER 1/2/3] button to select a song for recording.

The indicator of the selected song will light. (No song is selected if none of the

indicators are lit.)

2. Start playback.

Press the SONG [START/STOP] button.

The current measure number appears on the display during playback.

• You can play the keyboard while the Clavinova is playing back a song. You

can also play the notes in a voice different from the playback voice by select-

ing a voice from the panel.

Adjust the volume

Use the [MASTER VOLUME] control to adjust the volume.

Adjust the tempo

You can use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION# ▼, ▲] buttons to adjust the playback

tempo as required before or during playback. The default tempo (the song’s

original tempo) is set when you press the [▼] and [▲] buttons simultaneously.

3. Stop playback.

When playback is complete, the Clavinova automatically stops and locates the

top of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song, press the SONG

[START/STOP]

button.

NOTE

Song data is not transmitted via

the MIDI connectors.

213

MASTER VOLUME

BRILLIANCE

DEMO METRONOME

TEMPO

FUNCTION

TEMPO

OTHER VALUE

MELLOW BRIGHT

START

STOP

TEMPO

FUNCTION

MIN MAX

—

NO +

YES PRESET

USER 1

USER 2

TRACK

START

STOP

REC

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

E.PIANO

STRINGS

E.PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

VIBRA-

PHONE

CHOIR GUITAR E.BASS SPLIT

ROOM

HALL 1

HALL 2

STAGE

CHORUS

PHASER

TREMOLO

DELAY

HARD

MEDIUM

SOFT

VARIATION

GRAND

PIANO 2

JAZZ

ORGAN

WOOD

BASS

USER 3

VOICE

REVERB EFFECT TOUCH TRANSPOSE

SONG

NOTE (CLP-130)

When the unit is in Demo Song

mode, you cannot use the [USER

1/2/3] button to select a song.

NOTE

When the unit is in Demo Song

or Preset Song mode, you can-

not play back recorded songs.

NOTE

The track indicators will not light

up green automatically when the

power is turned on to the CLP-

120, even if the user song

recorder contains data. Make

sure that you press the track but-

tons before you start playback.

NOTE

Playback cannot be started when

the recorder contains no data.

TIP

You can also enjoy playing

duets with yourself by record-

ing one part of a duet or a song

for two pianos, then playing the

other part while the recorded

part plays back.

TIP

If the metronome is being used

during playback, the metro-

nome will automatically stop

when playback is stopped.

TIP

If the REVERB type is changed

via the panel controls during

playback, both the playback and

keyboard reverb effects will be

changed.

TIP

If the EFFECT type is changed

via the panel controls during

playback, the playback effect may

be switched off in some cases.

Procedure

CLP-130/120 Playing Back Recorded Songs

ENGLISH

Useful Playback Functions

Turning track playback on and off

When you select a song on the Clavinova, the indicators for tracks that contain

data (one of [TRACK1] [TRACK2] or both) are lit in green. While the Clavinova is play-

ing or stopped, pressing these track buttons turns off the indicators, and the data on

those tracks is not played. Pressing the track buttons toggles track playback on and off.

Starting playback automatically when you start playing the keyboard

(Synchro Start)

You can start playback as soon as you start playing the keyboard. This is called the

“Synchro Start” function.

To engage the Synchro Start function, press the SONG [START/STOP] button while

holding a track button that is ON.

The right-most dot on the display will ﬂash at the current

tempo.

(Repeat the previous operation to disengage the Synchro

Start function.)

Playback will then start as soon as you begin playing on the keyboard.

This function is useful when you wish to match the timing of the beginning of the play-

back sound and the start of your own performance.

Assigning the START/STOP function to the left pedal

The left pedal can also be assigned to song start/stop operation via the “Pedal Start/

Stop” (page 44).

This is convenient for starting playback of the recorded part anytime after you have

started playing.

TIP

Tracks can be turned on or off

before or during playback.

If both tracks are turned off on

the CLP-120, playback will not

start (or the playback will stop).

TIP

You can adjust the volume of a

part of a song from “50 Greats

for the Piano” for which play-

back is turned off

(pages 18, 45).

During recorder playback, the

volume of a track that is turned

off will always be “0.”

NOTE

If you press the SONG [START/

STOP] button while holding

down a track button that is OFF,

track playback is turned on and

the Synchro Start function is

placed on stand-by.

TERMINOLOGY

Synchro:

Synchronous; occurring at the

same time

Flash

CLP-130/120 Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION]

ENGLISH

Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION]

You can set various parameters to make the best use of Clavinova functions, such as ﬁne tuning the pitch, selecting a voice

for the metronome, repeating playback, etc.

The following parameters are available.

The CLP-130 has nine main functions, and the CLP-120 has eight main functions.

Some of these main functions consist of a set of sub-modes.

Parameter List

Function Sub-Mode CLP-130 CLP-120 Reference page

Fine tuning of the pitch

— F1 F1 40

Selecting a scale

Scale F2.1 F2.1 41

Base Note F2.2 F2.2 41

Dual mode functions

Dual Balance F3.1 F3.1 42

Dual Detune F3.2 F3.2 42

Voice 1 Octave Shift F3.3 F3.3 42

Voice 2 Octave Shift F3.4 F3.4 42

Voice 1 Effect Depth F3.5 F3.5 42

Voice 2 Effect Depth F3.6 F3.6 42

Reset F3.7 F3.7 42

Split mode functions

Split Point F4.1 — 43

Split Balance F4.2 — 43

Right Voice Octave Shift F4.3 — 43

Left Voice Octave Shift F4.4 — 43

Right Voice Effect Depth F4.5 — 43

Left Voice Effect Depth F4.6 — 43

Damper Pedal Range F4.7 — 43

Reset F4.8 — 43

Other Functions

Left Pedal Mode F5.1 F4.1 44

Soft Pedal Effect Depth F5.2 F4.2 44

Sustain Sample Depth F5.3 — 44

Keyoff Sample Volume F5.4 — 44

Metronome volume

— F6 F5 45

Preset Song Part Cancel

Volume

— F7 F6 45

MIDI Functions

MIDI Transmit Channel Selection F8.1 F7.1 45

MIDI Receive Channel Selection F8.2 F7.2 46

Local Control ON/OFF F8.3 F7.3 46

Program Change ON/OFF F8.4 F7.4 46

Control Change ON/OFF F8.5 F7.5 46

MIDI Transmit Transpose F8.6 F7.6 47

Panel/Status Transmit F8.7 F7.7 47

Bulk Data Dump F8.8 F7.8 47

Backup Functions

Voice F9.1 F8.1 48

MIDI F9.2 F8.2 48

Tuning F9.3 F8.3 48

Others F9.4 F8.4 48

CLP-130/120

Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION]

ENGLISH

Basic Procedure in Function Mode

Follow the steps below to use the functions.

(If you become lost while using a function, return to this page and read the basic procedure.)

Engage Function mode.

Press the

[TEMPO/FUNCTION#]

button so that its

[FUNCTION#]

indicator

lights.

will appear on the display. (The indication of “ ” varies depending on

the status of the unit and usage.)

Select a function.

Use the

[TEMPO/FUNCTION#

▼

▲

]

buttons to select the desired function

from F1–F9 (CLP-130) / F1–F8 (CLP-120).

Use the [–/NO] [+/YES] buttons.

If the function does not include sub-modes, start setting the parameters.

If the function includes sub-modes, press the

[+/YES]

button once to enter the

respective sub-mode.

Operate the desired function using the following

two buttons.

[TEMPO/FUNCTION#

▼

▲

]

Selects the desired function/sub-mode.

[–/NO]

[+/YES]

After you select the desired function or sub-mode, set the ON/OFF, select

the type, or change the value, accordingly.

Depending on the setting, the default setting (which is used when you

ﬁrst turn on the power to the Clavinova) is recalled by pressing the

[–/

NO]

and

[+/YES]

buttons simultaneously.

124 45

MASTER VOLUME

BRILLIANCE

DEMO METRONOME

TEMPO

FUNCTION

TEMPO

OTHE R VALUE

MELLOW BRIGHT

START

STOP

TEMPO

FUNCTION

MIN MAX

–

NO +

YES PRESET

USER 1

USER 2

TRACK

START

STOP

REC

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

E.PIANO

STRINGS

E.PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

VIBRA-

PHONE

CHOIR GUITAR E.BASS SPLIT

ROOM

HALL 1

HALL 2

STAGE

CHORUS

PHASER

TREMOLO

DELAY

HARD

MEDIUM

SOFT

VARIATION

GRAND

PIANO 2

JAZZ

ORGAN

WOOD

BASS

USER 3

VOIC E

REVERB EFFECT TOUCH TRANSPOSE

SONG

Procedure

NOTE

Functions cannot be selected

during Demo/Preset Song

mode or when the user song

recorder is in operation.

NOTE

To cancel the function in Step 2,

3, or 4, press the

[TEMPO/

FUNCTION#

▼

▲

]

button any

time to exit Function mode.

TEMPO

FUNCTION

TEMPO

FUNCTION

TIP

After you select the function, the

current setting will be displayed

when the

[–/NO]

[+/YES]

but-

ton is pressed for the ﬁrst time.

CLP-130/120 Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION]

ENGLISH

Operation Example 1 (F1. Fine tuning of the pitch)

Operation Example 2 (F3.1 “Dual Balance”)

5. Do the following when you ﬁnish using the func-

tion.

To exit Function mode, press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION#] button so that its

[TEMPO] indicator lights.

Change the value.

Engage Function mode.

Select a desired function.

TEMPO

FUNCTION

TEMPO

FUNCTION

TEMPO

FUNCTION

TEMPO

FUNCTION

–

NO +

YES

LCD indication

Engage the respective

sub-mode.

Engage function mode.

Select a desired function.

Select a desired sub-mode.

Change the value.

TEMPO

FUNCTION

TEMPO

FUNCTION

TEMPO

FUNCTION

TEMPO

FUNCTION

TEMPO

FUNCTION

TEMPO

FUNCTION

–

NO +

YES

LCD indication

CLP-130/120 Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION]

ENGLISH

About Each Function

You can ﬁne tune the pitch of the entire instru-

ment. This function is useful when you play

the Clavinova along with other instruments or

CD music.

1. Engage Function mode and select .

2. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to lower

or raise the pitch of the A3 key in approxi-

mately 0.2 Hz increments.

..... .....

Tenths of a hertz are indicated on the LED display by

the appearance and position of one or two dots, as in

the following example:

• Refer to “Part Names” on page 14 for information on

the key and key name assignment.

(During the procedure described above, the display indi-

cates a value in Hz < … >. After the proce-

dure, the display returns to the previous indication.)

(During the procedure described above, the display indi-

cates a value in Hz < … >. After the proce-

dure, the display returns to the previous indication.)

F1. Fine Tuning of the Pitch

Display Value

440.0

Setting range:

440.2

427.0–453.0 (Hz)

440.4

Normal setting:

440.6

440.0 (Hz)

440.8

TERMINOLOGY

Hz (Hertz):

This unit of measurement refers to the frequency of a sound

and represents the number of times a sound wave vibrates in

a second.

TIP

You can also use the keyboard to set the pitch (in any

mode other than Function mode).

To tune up (in about 0.2Hz steps): Hold the A-1 and B-1

keys (two white keys at the left end) simultaneously and

press any key between C3 and B3.

To tune down (in about 0.2Hz steps): Hold the A-1 and A



1 keys (a white and a black key at the left end) simulta-

neously and press any key between C3 and B3.

To restore standard pitch: Hold the A-1, A



-1 and B-1 (two

white keys and one black key at the left end) simultaneously

and press any key between C3 and B3.

TIP

You can also tune in about 1Hz steps (in any mode other

than Function mode).

To tune down or up, respectively, in approximately 1 Hz

increments: Hold the A-1 and A



-1 keys (a white and a black

key at the left end) or A-1 and B-1 keys (two white keys at the

left end) simultaneously and press the [–/NO] or [+/YES] but-

ton.

To restore standard pitch: Hold the A-1 and A



-1 keys (a

white and a black key at the left end) or A-1 and B-1 keys

(two white keys at the left end) simultaneously and press the

[–/NO] [+/YES] buttons simultaneously.

CLP-130/120 Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION]

ENGLISH

You can select various scales.

Equal Temperament is the most common con-

temporary piano tuning scale. However, his-

tory has known numerous other scales, many

of which serve as the basis for certain genres of

music. You can experience these tunings with

the Clavinova.

Equal

One octave is divided into twelve equal intervals. Cur-

rently the most popular piano tuning scale.

PureMajor/PureMinor

Based on natural overtones, three major chords using

these scales produce a beautiful, pure sound. They are

sometimes used for chorus parts.

Pythagorean

This scale, designed by Pythagoras, a Greek philosopher,

is based on the interval of a perfect 5th.

The 3rd produces swells, but the 4th and 5th are beauti-

ful and suitable for some leads.

MeanTone

This scale is an improvement of the Pythagorean in that

the swell of the 3rd has been eliminated. The scale

became popular during the late 16th century through the

late 18th century, and was used by Handel.

WerckMeister/KirnBerger

These scales combine Mean Tone and Pythagorean in

different ways. With these scales, modulation changes the

impression and feel of the songs. They were often used in

the era of Bach and Beethoven. They are often used today

to reproduce the music of that era on harpsichords.

1. Engage Function mode and select .

2. Press the [+/YES] button to engage the scale

function’s sub-mode, then use the [TEMPO/

FUNCTION# ▼, ▲] buttons to select the

desired sub-mode.

Press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to select

the number of the desired tuning.

Sub-mode

F2.1: Scale

Setting range: 1: Equal Temperament

2: Pure Major

3: Pure Minor

4: Pythagorean

5: Mean Tone

6: Werckmeister

7: Kirnberger

Normal setting: 1: Equal Temperament

F2.2: Base Note

If you select a scale other than Equal Temperament, you

need to specify the root. (You can specify the root note

with Equal Temperament selected, but it is not effective.

The base note setting is effective for tunings other than

the Equal Temperament tuning.)

Setting range:

Normal setting:

• Root indication example

F2. Selecting a Scale



) (G)

followed by

a high bar if sharp



)

followed by

a low bar if flat

CLP-130/120 Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION]

ENGLISH

You can set various parameters for Dual mode

to optimize the settings for the songs you play,

such as adjusting the volume balance between

two voices.

Dual mode function settings are set individu-

ally for each voice combination.

1. Select the voices in Dual mode and engage

Function mode and select .

2. Press the [+/YES] button to engage the Dual

mode function’s sub-mode, then use the

[TEMPO/FUNCTION# ▼, ▲] buttons to select

the desired sub-mode. Press the [–/NO] [+/

YES] button to assign values.

Sub-mode

F3.1: Dual Balance

Setting range: 0 – 20 (A setting of “10” produces an

equal balance between the two Dual

mode voices. Settings below “10”

increase the volume of Voice 2 in

relation to Voice 1, and settings

above “10” increase the volume of

Voice 1 in relation to Voice 2.)

Normal setting: Different for each voice combina-

tion.

You can set one voice as the main voice, and another

voice as a softer, mixed voice.

F3.2: Dual Detune

Setting range: -10 – 0 – 10 (With positive values,

the pitch of Voice 1 is raised and the

pitch of Voice 2 is lowered. With neg-

ative values, the pitch of Voice 1 is

lowered and the pitch of Voice 2 is

raised.)

Normal setting: Different for each voice combina-

tion.

Detune Voice 1 and Voice 2 for Dual mode to create a

thicker sound.

F3.3: Voice 1 Octave Shift

F3.4: Voice 2 Octave Shift

Setting range: –1, 0, 1

Normal setting: Different for each voice combina-

tion.

You can shift the pitch up and down in octave steps for

Voice 1 and Voice 2 independently. Depending on which

voices you combine in Dual mode, the combination may

sound better if one of the voices is shifted up or down an

octave.

F3.5: Voice 1 Effect Depth

F3.6: Voice 2 Effect Depth

Setting range: 0 – 20

Normal setting: Different for each voice combina-

tion.

These functions make it possible to individually set the

depth of the effect for Voices 1 and 2 for Dual mode.

(The effect depth settings cannot be changed unless the

[EFFECT] is ON. Function mode must be exited before

the [EFFECT] can be turned ON.)

• “Voice 1” and “Voice 2” are explained on page 26.

F3.7: Reset

This function resets all Dual mode functions to their

default values. Press the [+/YES] button to reset the val-

ues.

F3. Dual Mode Functions

NOTE

If Dual mode is not engaged, will appear instead of

and you will be unable to select Dual mode functions.

You can switch from Function mode to Dual mode.

TIP

The available setting range is wider in the lower range (± 60

cents for A-1), and narrower in the higher range (± 5 cents for

C7). (100 cents equal one semitone.)

TIP

SHORTCUT:

You can jump directly to the Dual mode functions by

pressing the [TEMPO/FUNCTION#] button while holding the

two Dual mode voice buttons.

To exit Function mode, you still need to press the [TEMPO/

FUNCTION#] button so that the TEMPO indicator lights up.

CLP-130/120 Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION]

ENGLISH

This menu enables you to make various

detailed settings for Split mode.

By changing the split point or other setting,

you can optimize the settings for the songs

you play.

You can make these settings for each combi-

nation of voices individually.

1. Select the voices in Split mode and engage

Function mode and select .

2. Press the [+/YES] button to engage the Split

mode function’s sub-mode, then use the

[TEMPO/FUNCTION# ▼, ▲] buttons to select

the desired sub-mode. Press the [–/NO] [+/

YES] button to assign values.

Sub-mode

F4.1: Split Point

Setting range: The entire keyboard

Normal setting: F



Set the point on the keyboard that separates the right and

left-hand sections (split point). The pressed key is

included in the left-hand range.

• Instead of pressing the [–/NO] [+/YES] buttons, you

can engage the split point by pressing the appropriate

key on the keyboard.

• If Function mode is not engaged, you can change the

split point to any other key by pressing the key while

holding the [SPLIT] button (page 27).

• An example of a key name indication for a split point

F4.2: Split Balance

Setting range: 0 – 20 (A setting of “10” produces an

equal balance between the two Split

mode voices. Settings below “10”

increase the volume of the left voice

in relation to the right voice, and set-

tings above “10” increase the volume

of the right voice in relation to the

left voice.)

Normal setting: Different for each voice combina-

tion.

The volume level of the two voices combined in Split

mode can be adjusted as required.

F4.3: Right Voice Octave Shift

F4.4: Left Voice Octave Shift

Setting range: –1, 0, 1

Normal setting: Different for each voice combination

You can shift the pitch up and down in octave steps for

the Right Voice and Left Voice independently. Make a set-

ting depending on the note range of the songs you play.

F4.5: Right Voice Effect Depth

F4.6: Left Voice Effect Depth

Setting range: 0 – 20

Normal setting: Different for each voice combination

These functions make it possible to individually set the

depth of the effect for the left and right Split mode

voices.

The effect depth settings cannot be changed unless the

[EFFECT] is ON. You must exit Function mode before

you can turn on an [EFFECT].

F4.7: Damper Pedal Range

Setting range: ALL (for both voices)

1 (for the right Voice)

2 (for the left Voice)

Normal setting: ALL

The Damper Pedal Range function determines whether

the damper pedal affects the right voice, the left voice, or

both the left and right voices in Split mode.

F4.8: Reset

This function resets all Split mode functions to their

default values. Press the [+/YES] button to reset the val-

ues.

F4. (CLP-130) Split Mode Functions

NOTE

If Split mode is not engaged, will appear instead of

and you will be unable to select Split mode functions.

Also note that you must exit Function mode before you can

engage Split mode.



2) (G2)

followed by

a high bar if sharp



followed by

a low bar if flat

TIP

SHORTCUT:

You can jump directly to Split mode functions by press-

ing the [TEMPO/FUNCTION#] button while holding the

[SPLIT] button.

To exit Function mode, you still need to press the [TEMPO/

FUNCTION#] button so that the TEMPO indicator lights up.

CLP-130/120 Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION]

ENGLISH

This function conveniently lets you set opera-

tion of the left pedal to one of the modes

listed below.

1. Engage Function mode and select (CLP-

130)/ (CLP-120).

2. Press the [+/YES] button to engage the other

functions’ sub-mode, then use the [TEMPO/

FUNCTION# ▼, ▲] buttons to select the

desired sub-mode.

Press the [–/NO] or [+/YES] button to select

the desired pedal function or assign the val-

ues.

Sub-mode

F5.1

(CLP-130)/F4.1 (CLP-120)

Left Pedal Mode

Setting range:

1. Soft Pedal

The soft pedal reduces the volume and slightly

changes the timbre of notes played while the pedal is

pressed. The soft pedal will not affect notes that are

already playing.

2. Song Start/Stop

This mode allows you to start or stop song playback.

In this mode, the Left Pedal functions in the same

manner as the SONG [START/STOP] button on the

panel.

3. Variation (CLP-130)

This mode enables you to switch the Voice’s variation

on or off. In this mode, the left pedal functions in the

same manner as the [VARIATION] button on the

panel.

Normal setting: 1(Soft Pedal)

F5.2 (CLP-130)/F4.2 (CLP-120)

Soft Pedal Effect Depth

Setting range: 1 – 15

Normal setting: 3

This function sets the depth of the soft pedal effect.

F5.3 (CLP-130) Sustain Sample Depth

Setting range: 0 – 20

Normal setting: 12

The GRAND PIANO 1 voice features special “Sustain

Samples” that recreate the unique resonance of an acous-

tic grand piano’s soundboard and strings when the

damper pedal is pressed. This function lets you adjust the

depth of this effect.

F5.4 (CLP-130) Keyoff Sample Volume

Setting range: 0 – 20

Normal setting: 10

You can adjust the volume of the keyoff sound (the sub-

tle sound produced when the keys are released) for voices

[GRAND PIANO1], [HARPSICHORD], [E.CLAVICHORD]

(including their variations).

F5. (CLP-130) / F4. (CLP-120)

Other Functions

CLP-130/120 Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION]

ENGLISH

You can change the volume of the metronome

sound.

Use this function to adjust the metronome vol-

ume.

1. Engage Function mode and select (CLP-

130)/ (CLP-120).

2. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to set the

metronome volume as required.

Setting range: 1 – 20

Normal setting: 10

This function sets the volume at which a “can-

celed” part is played during preset song play-

back. Adjust the part volume to a comfortable

level and use the “canceled” part as a guide

with which to play along.

1. Engage Function mode and select (CLP-

130)/ (CLP-120).

2. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to set the

volume as required.

Setting range: 0 – 20

Normal setting: 5

You can make detailed adjustments to MIDI

settings.

For more information about MIDI, see the

“About MIDI” section (page 49).

1. Engage Function mode and select (CLP-

130)/ (CLP-120).

2. Press the [+/YES] button to engage the MIDI

function’s sub-mode, then use the [TEMPO/

FUNCTION# ▼, ▲] buttons to select the

desired sub-mode.

Press the [–/NO] or [+/YES] button to set a

selected parameter.

Sub-mode

F8.1:

(CLP-130)/F7.1: (CLP-120)

MIDI Transmit Channel Selection

In any MIDI control setup, the MIDI channels of the

transmitting and receiving equipment must be matched

for proper data transfer.

This parameter enables you to specify the channel on

which the Clavinova transmits MIDI data.

Setting range: 1 – 16, OFF (not transmitted)

Normal setting: 1

F.6 (CLP-130) / F.5 (CLP-120)

Metronome Volume

TIP

SHORTCUT:

You can jump directly to the metronome functions

(CLP-130)/ (CLP-120) by pressing the [TEMPO/FUNC-

TION#] button while holding the METRONOME [START/

STOP] button.

To exit Function mode, you still need to press the [TEMPO/

FUNCTION#] button so that the TEMPO indicator lights up.

F7. (CLP-130) / F6. (CLP-120)

Preset Song Part Cancel Volume

F8. (CLP-130) / F7. (CLP-120)

MIDI Functions

TIP

The HOST SELECT switch on the bottom surface must be

set to “MIDI” to enable the MIDI connectors. When you use

the TO HOST connector, set the HOST SELECT switch to

the appropriate position for the type of computer you are

using (pages 49–55). In this situation, all MIDI settings

described below will affect the MIDI signal in and out of the

TO HOST connector.

NOTE

In Dual mode, Voice 1 data is transmitted on its speciﬁed

channel. In Split mode (CLP-130), right voice data is trans-

mitted on its speciﬁed channel. In Dual mode, Voice 2 data is

transmitted on the next greater channel number relative to

the speciﬁed channel. In Split mode (CLP-130), left voice

data is transmitted on the next greater channel number rela-

tive to the speciﬁed channel. In either mode, no data is trans-

mitted if the transmit channel is set to “OFF”.

NOTE

Demo/preset song data and recorder playback data are not

transmitted via MIDI.

CLP-130/120 Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION]

ENGLISH

F8.2: (CLP-130)/F7.2: (CLP-120)

MIDI Receive Channel Selection

In any MIDI control setup, the MIDI channels of the

transmitting and receiving equipment must be matched

for proper data transfer. This parameter enables you to

specify the channel on which the Clavinova receives

MIDI data.

Setting range: ALL, 1&2, 1 – 16

Normal setting: ALL

F8.3: (CLP-130)/F7.3: (CLP-120)

Local Control ON/OFF

“Local Control” refers to the fact that, normally, the

CLP-130/120 keyboard controls its internal tone genera-

tor, allowing the internal voices to be played directly

from the keyboard. This situation is “Local Control On,”

since the internal tone generator is controlled locally by

its own keyboard.

Local control can be turned OFF, however, so that the

CLP-130/120 keyboard does not play the internal voices,

but the appropriate MIDI information is still transmitted

via the MIDI OUT connector when notes are played on

the keyboard. At the same time, the internal tone genera-

tor responds to MIDI information received via the MIDI

IN connector.

Setting range: ON/OFF

Normal setting: ON

F8.4: (CLP-130)/F7.4: (CLP-120)

Program Change ON/OFF

Normally the CLP-130/120 will respond to MIDI pro-

gram change numbers received from an external key-

board or other MIDI device, causing the

correspondingly-numbered voice to be selected on the

corresponding channel (the keyboard voice does not

change). The CLP-130/120 will normally also send a

MIDI program change number whenever one of its

voices is selected, causing the correspondingly-num-

bered voice or program to be selected on the external

MIDI device if the device is set up to receive and respond

to MIDI program change numbers.

This function makes it possible to cancel program

change number reception and transmission so that

voices can be selected on the CLP-130/120 without

affecting the external MIDI device.

Setting range: ON/OFF

Normal setting: ON

F8.5: (CLP-130)/F7.5: (CLP-120)

Control Change ON/OFF

Normally the CLP-130/120 will respond to MIDI control

change data received from an external MIDI device or

keyboard, causing the voice on the corresponding chan-

nel to be affected by pedal and other “control” settings

received from the controlling device (the keyboard voice

is not affected).

The CLP-130/120 also transmits MIDI control change

information when the pedal or other appropriate con-

trols are operated.

This function makes it possible to cancel control change

data reception and transmission so that, for example, the

CLP-130/120’s pedal and other controls can be operated

without affecting an external MIDI device.

Setting range: ON/OFF

Normal setting: ON

TIP

ALL:

A “Multi-timbre” Receive mode is available. It allows simulta-

neous reception of different parts on all 16 MIDI channels,

enabling the Clavinova to play multi-channel song data

received from a music computer or sequencer.

1&2:

A “1&2” Receive mode is available. It allows simultaneous

reception on channels 1 and 2 only, enabling the Clavinova to

play 1 and 2 channel song data received from a music com-

puter or sequencer.

TIP

Program change and other like channel messages received

will not affect the CLP-130/120’s panel settings or the notes

you play on the keyboard.

NOTE

No MIDI reception occurs when Demo/Preset Song mode is

engaged.

TIP

For information on program change numbers for each of the

CLP-130/120’s voices, refer to page 71 in the MIDI Data For-

mat section.

TIP

For information on control changes that can be used with the

CLP-130/120, refer to the MIDI Data Format on page 71.

CLP-130/120 Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION]

ENGLISH

F8.6: (CLP-130)/F7.6: (CLP-120)

MIDI Transmit Transpose

This function allows the MIDI note data transmitted by

the CLP-130/120 to be transposed up or down in semi-

tone increments by up to plus or minus 12 semitones.

The pitch of the CLP-130/120 itself is not affected.

Setting range: -12 – 0 – 12 (in semitones)

Normal setting: 0

F8.7: (CLP-130)/F7.7: (CLP-120)

Panel/Status Transmit

This function causes all the current CLP-130/120 panel

settings (selected voice, etc.) to be transmitted via the

MIDI OUT terminal. This is particularly useful if you

will be recording performances to a MIDI sequence

recorder, such as the Yamaha MIDI Data Filer MDF3,

which will be used to control the CLP-130/120 on play-

back. By transmitting the CLP-130/120 panel settings

and recording them on the MIDI sequence recorder

prior to the actual performance data, the CLP-130/120

will be automatically restored to the same settings when

the performance is played back.

Procedure

1. Set up the panel controls as desired.

2. Connect the Clavinova to a sequencer via MIDI, and

set up the sequencer so it can receive the setup data.

3. Engage Function mode and select (CLP-130)/

(CLP-120).

4. Press the

[+/YES] button to transmit the panel/status

data.

will appear on the LED display when the data has

been successfully transmitted.

F8.8: (CLP-130)/F7.8: (CLP-120)

Bulk Data Dump

You can save current song data on the Clavinova as MIDI

bulk data by transferring it to a connected MIDI data

ﬁler (such as an MDF3) or a sequencer. To play back the

saved song data, send the bulk data back from the storage

device to the Clavinova and follow the usual playback

procedure.

Procedure

1. Record your performance on the Clavinova.

2. Connect the Clavinova to MDF3, a MIDI data ﬁler via

MIDI, and set up the MDF3 so it will receive bulk

data.

3. Engage Function mode and select (CLP-130)/

(CLP-120).

4. Press the [+/YES] button to begin bulk transmission.

will appear on the LED display when the data has

been successfully transmitted.

TERMINOLOGY

Setup Data:

Data that contains a set of panel settings for the Clavinova.

TIP

See page 72 for a list of the “Panel Data Contents” transmit-

ted by this function.

TIP

Receiving the transmitted data:

1. Connect the Clavinova via MIDI to the device to which the

setup data was transmitted previously.

2. Start sending the setup data from the device.

The Clavinova automatically receives the setup data, which

will be reﬂected in the panel settings.

(For the data to be accepted, the Clavinova that receives the

setup data should be the same model as the one that trans-

mitted the setup data to the sequencer.)

TIP

For more information on transmitting and receiving setup

data via MIDI, refer to the owner’s manual for the connected

MIDI device.

TERMINOLOGY

bulk data:

A complete set or extended sequence of data

NOTE

No MIDI note/panel data transmission or data reception

occurs during a bulk data dump transmit operation.

TIP

Receiving (returning) the transmitted data:

1. Connect the CLP-130/120 via MIDI to the device to which

the data was previously transmitted.

2. Start sending the data from the device.

The CLP-130/120 automatically receives the data from the

unit. (At this time, any data previously stored in the Clavinova

will be erased.)

Then, follow the usual playback procedure.

(For the data to be accepted, the Clavinova that receives the

data should be the same model as the one from which the

data was once transmitted to the MIDI data ﬁler.)

NOTE

The reload operation cannot be executed when Demo/Preset

Song mode or the user song recorder is in operation, or

when Function mode is engaged.

TIP

For more information on transmitting and receiving bulk data

via MIDI, refer to the owner’s manual for the connected MIDI

device.

CLP-130/120 Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION]

ENGLISH

However, the backup settings themselves, and the con-

tents of the user song recorder memory, are always

backed up.

CAUTION

Even if the backup function is turned on via one of the

functions described below, the data will be retained in

memory for only about one week if the power is not

turned on during this time. If the backup period is

exceeded, all settings will be reset to their default values.

If you want to retain the backup settings for longer peri-

ods, be sure to turn the power on for a few minutes at

least once a week.

You can turn the backup function on or off for

each function group (each of the following

sub-mode functions).

1. Engage Function mode and select (CLP-

130)/ (CLP-120).

2. Press the [+/YES] button to engage the

backup function’s sub-mode, then use the

[TEMPO/FUNCTION# ▼, ▲] buttons to select

the desired sub-mode.

Press the [–/NO] or [+/YES] button to turn the

backup function on or off.

Sub-mode

F9.1:

(CLP-130)/F8.1: (CLP-120) Voice

F9.2:

(CLP-130)/F8.2: (CLP-120) MIDI

F9.3:

(CLP-130)/F8.3: (CLP-120) Tuning

F9.4:

(CLP-130)/F8.4: (CLP-120) Others

Setting range: ON/OFF

Normal setting: OFF (all groups)

Description of sub-modes

F9.1:

(CLP-130)/F8.1: (CLP-120) Voice

• Voice (Keyboard, Dual, and Split <CLP-130>)

• Dual (ON/OFF, Voice, and Dual Functions for each

voice combination)

• Split (CLP-130) (ON/OFF, Voice, and Split Functions

for each voice combination)

• Reverb (ON/OFF, Type, and Depth for each voice)

• Effect (ON/OFF, Type, and Depth for each voice)

• Variation (CLP-130) (for each voice)

• Touch Sensitivity (including the FIXED volume)

• Metronome (Beat, Volume < (CLP-130)/

(CLP-120) settings>)

• Preset Song Part Cancel Volume ( <CLP-130>/

<CLP-120> settings)

F9.2: (CLP-130)/F8.2: (CLP-120) MIDI

The MIDI functions ( <CLP-130>/ <CLP-

120> settings)

(expect for the <CLP-130>/

<CLP-120>)

F9.3: (CLP-130)/F8.3: (CLP-120) Tuning

• Transpose

• Tuning ( settings)

• Scale (including base note) ( settings)

F9.4: (CLP-130)/F8.4: (CLP-120) Others

Other functions ( <CLP-130>/ <CLP-120>

settings)

Factory Preset Recall

All Dual mode, Split mode, reverb, effect, touch sensitiv-

ity, tuning settings, and the settings affected by the

Backup Functions can be restored to their original fac-

tory preset values by holding the C7 key (right-most key

on the keyboard) while turning the [POWER] button

ON. This also erases all user song recorder data, and sets

all backup on/off settings (F9) to “OFF”. (The factory set-

ting list is found on page 70.)

F9. (CLP-130) / F8. (CLP-120)

Backup Functions

TERMINOLOGY

Backup:

You can back up some settings, such as voice selection and

reverb type, so that they will not be lost when you turn off the

power to the Clavinova.

If the backup function is turned on, the settings at power off

are effective. If the backup function is turned off, the settings

in memory are erased when you turn off the power. In this

case, when you turn on the power to the unit, the default set-

tings (the initial settings) will be used. (The factory setting

default list is found on page 70.)

CLP-130/120 About MIDI

ENGLISH

About MIDI

MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a standard format for

data transmission/reception. It enables the transfer of performance

data and commands between MIDI devices and personal computers.

Using MIDI, you can control a connected MIDI device from the Clavi-

nova, or control the Clavinova from a connected MIDI device or com-

puter.

MIDI connectors

MIDI [IN]: Receives MIDI data.

MIDI [OUT]: Transmits MIDI data.

MIDI [THRU]: Transmits data received at the MIDI [IN] connector as it is.

MIDI cables

Prepare dedicated MIDI cables.

[TO HOST] connector

Use this connector to connect the Clavinova to a computer.

TIP

MIDI performance data and

commands are transferred in

the form of numeric values.

TIP

Since MIDI data that can be

transmitted or received varies

depending on the type of MIDI

device, check the “MIDI Imple-

mentation Chart” to ﬁnd out

what MIDI data and commands

your devices can transmit or

receive. The Clavinova’s MIDI

Implementation Chart appears

on page 75.

HOST SELECT

MIDI

THRU

MIDI

PC-2

Mac

PC-1

OUT IN

(CLP-130)

NOTE

When you are using the MIDI

connectors, set the [HOST

SELECT] switch to “MIDI”

(page 54).

NOTE

When you are using the [TO

HOST] connector, set the

[HOST SELECT] switch,

according to the type of com-

puter you are using (page 54).

TIP

You can also obtain detailed

information about MIDI from

various music books and other

publications.

TO HOST HOST SELECT

MIDI

PC-2

Mac

PC-1

CLP-130/120 Connections

ENGLISH

Connections

Connectors

CAUTION

Before connecting the Clavinova to other electronic components, turn off the power to all the components. Before turn-

ing the power on or off to all components, set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, electrical shock or damage to

the components may result.

1 AUX OUT [R] [L] Pin jacks (LEVEL FIXED), [R] [L/L+R] Phone jacks

You can connect these jacks to a stereo system to amplify the Clavinova or to a cas-

sette tape recorder to record your performance. Refer to the diagram below and use

audio cables to make the connections.

CAUTION

Do not route the output from the AUX OUT jacks to the AUX IN jacks. That is, when

you connect an external audio device to the AUX OUT jacks, do not connect the audio

device to the Clavinova’s AUX IN jacks. If you make this connection, the signal input at

the AUX IN jacks will be output from AUX OUT. This creates an audio loop, causing

audio oscillation and abnormal playback, and leading to malfunction of both pieces of

equipment.

CAUTION

When the Clavinova’s AUX OUT jacks are connected to an external audio system, ﬁrst

turn on the power to the Clavinova, then to the external audio system. Reverse this

order when you turn the power off.

PEDAL

AUX IN

AUX OUT

L+RRL

LEVEL FIXED

TO HOST HOST SELECT

MIDI

THRU

MIDI

PC-2

Mac

PC-1

OUT IN

CLP-130

AUX OUT AUX IN

L+R

LEVEL FIXED

R L

L+RRLR

PEDAL

TO HOST HOST SELECT

MIDI

THRU

MIDIMac

PC-2PC-1

OUT IN

CLP-120

NOTE

Use audio cables and adaptor

plugs with no resistance.

NOTE

The Clavinova’s [MASTER

VOLUME] and [BRILLIANCE]

slider setting does not affect the

signal output from the AUX OUT

(LEVEL FIXED) jacks.

Clavinova

Stereo

RCA

pin plug

To powered speakers

RCA

pin plug

AUX IN

When these are connected (with stan-

dard phone plugs), you can use the

[MASTER VOLUME] control to adjust

the volume of the sound output to the

external device.

AUX OUT

L+RRL

LEVEL FIXED

When these are connected (with RCA pin

plug; LEVEL FIXED), the sound is output to

the external device at a fixed level, regardless

of the [MASTER VOLUME] control setting.

phone

plug

(standard)

audio cable

CLP-130/120 Connections

ENGLISH

2 AUX IN [R], [L/L+R] jacks

The stereo outputs from another instrument can be connected to these jacks,

allowing the sound of an external instrument to be reproduced via the Clavinova’s

speakers. Refer to the diagram below and use audio cables to make the connec-

tions.

CAUTION

When the Clavinova’s AUX IN jacks are connected to an external device, ﬁrst turn on

the power to the external device, then to the Clavinova. Reverse this order when you

turn the power off.

3 TO HOST jack

This jack allows direct connection to a personal computer. (Refer to “Connecting a

personal computer” on page 52 for more information.)

4 HOST SELECT switch

This switch should be set according to the type of connected MIDI device or per-

sonal computer. (Refer to “Connecting a personal computer” on page 52 for more

information.)

5 MIDI [IN], [OUT], [THRU] connectors

Use MIDI cables to connect external MIDI devices to these connectors.

Make sure you set the HOST SELECT switch to MIDI when you use these connec-

tors.

(Refer to “About MIDI” on page 49 for more information.)

6 PEDAL jack

Connect the pedal cord from the pedal box. (Refer to “Keyboard Stand Assembly”

on pages 57-62.)

NOTE

The Clavinova’s [MASTER

VOLUME] and [BRILLIANCE]

slider settings affect the input

signal from the AUX IN jacks,

but the [REVERB] and

[EFFECT] settings do not.

NOTE

If you connect the Clavinova to

a monaural device, use only the

AUX IN [L/L+R] jack or AUX

OUT [L/L+R] jack.

AUX IN

audio cable

Tone Generator

AUX OUT

Clavinova

phone plug

(standard)

phone plug

(standard)

AUX IN

L+RR

CLP-130/120

Connections

ENGLISH

Connecting a Personal Computer

You can enjoy computer music data on the Clavinova by connecting a computer to the TO HOST

(or MIDI) jack.

There are three methods by which to connect the Clavinova to a personal computer:

1. Connect the serial port on the computer to the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack (page 53).

2. Use a MIDI interface and the Clavinova’s MIDI connectors (page 54).

3. Use the USB port on the computer and the UX256, UX96, or UX16, a USB interface (page 55).

For more information, refer to the speciﬁed pages.

NOTE

When the Clavinova is used as a tone module, performance data with voices that are not found on the Clavinova will not

be played correctly.

“The Clavinova-Computer Connection,”

is a supplementary guidebook that describes, for beginners, what you

can do with your Clavinova and a personal computer and how to set up a Clavinova-Computer system (the manual is

not written for any speciﬁc models). The document is available as a PDF ﬁle (in English) at the following Internet

address:

Clavinova Web site (English only):

http://www.yamahaclavinova.com/

Yamaha Manual Library:

http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/

NOTE

When connecting the Clavinova to a personal computer, ﬁrst turn off the power to both the Clavinova and the computer

before you connect any cables or set the HOST SELECT switch. After making the connections and switch settings, turn

on the power to the computer ﬁrst, then to the Clavinova.

NOTE

If you do not use the

[TO HOST]

jack of the Clavinova, make sure you disconnect the cable from the jack. If the cable is

left connected, the Clavinova may not function properly.

NOTE

will appear in the display if the host computer is not turned on, the connecting cable is not properly connected,

the HOST SELECT switch is not in the proper position, or the MIDI driver or MIDI application is not active. In this situa-

tion, turn the power off to both the Clavinova and the computer, and check the cable connection and the position of the

HOST SELECT switch. Once the connection and HOST SELECT switch position is veriﬁed, turn the power of the com-

puter on ﬁrst, then the Clavinova, and check whether the MIDI driver and MIDI application function properly.

NOTE

When the

[HOST SELECT]

switch is set to “PC-1,” PC-2,” or “Mac,” you can use the

[TO HOST]

jack, but the MIDI con-

nectors are disabled since no data transfer occurs via the MIDI connectors. On the other hand, when the

[HOST

SELECT]

switch is set to “MIDI,” you can use the MIDI connectors, but not the

[TO HOST]

jack since no data is trans-

ferred via the

[TO HOST]

jack.

CLP-130/120 Connections

ENGLISH

1. Connecting the serial port on the computer to the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack

Connect the computer’s serial port (RS-232C or RS-422) to the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack.

With this connection, the Clavinova functions as a MIDI interface. Therefore, you do not need a special MIDI interface.

Connection

Use a special serial cable (page 53) to connect the computer’s serial port (RS-232C or RS-422) to the Clavinova’s TO

HOST jack.

Type of serial cables and connection pin assignments

Depending on the type of computer you connect, use one of the following serial cables.

Note for Windows users

(regarding the MIDI driver)

To transfer data via the computer’s

serial port and the Clavinova’s TO

HOST jack, you need to install a

speciﬁc MIDI driver (the Yamaha

CBX driver for Windows). You can

download this driver from the fol-

lowing XG Library on the Yamaha

web site:

http://www.yamaha-xg.com

Clavinova

TO HOST

TO HOST HOST SELECT

MIDI

PC-2

Mac

PC-1

Windows Windows Macintosh

modem portRS-232C (D-sub 9-pin) RS-232C (D-sub 25-pin)

Windows (with a serial port of D-sub 9-pin)

8-pin mini DIN plug ➝ D-sub 9-pin plug

(Yamaha CCJ-PC2 or equivalent)

Macintosh

System peripheral plug ➝ 8-pin plug

(Yamaha CCJ-MAC or equivalent)

Windows (with a serial port of D-sub 25-pin)

8-pin mini DIN plug ➝ D-sub 25-pin plug

(Yamaha CCJ-PC1NF or equivalent)

Pin assignment

The following diagram shows the pin assignments for each cable.

8 (CTS)

7 (RTS)

2 (RxD)

5 (GND)

3 (TxD)

mini DIN

8-pin

D-sub

9-pin

2 (HSK i)

1 (HSK O)

5 (RxD-)

4 (GND)

3 (TxD-)

8 (RxD+)

7 (GP-)

6 (TxD+)

mini DIN

8-pin

mini DIN

8-pin

5 (CTS)

4 (RTS)

3 (RxD)

7 (GND)

2 (TxD)

mini DIN

8-pin

D-sub

25-pin

mini DIN 8-pin

D-sub 25-pin

Pin numbers (view from front)

D-sub 9-pin

CLP-130/120 Connections

ENGLISH

Clavinova HOST SELECT switch setting

Set the Clavinova HOST SELECT switch properly according to the type of connected computer.

• Macintosh: “Mac” (data transfer rate: 31,250bps, 1MHz clock)

• Windows: “PC-2” (data transfer rate: 38,400bps)

2. Using a MIDI interface and the Clavinova’s MIDI connectors

Connection

Use a MIDI interface device to connect a computer to the Clavinova using special MIDI cables.

Clavinova HOST SELECT switch setting

Set the Clavinova HOST SELECT switch to “MIDI.”

TIP

If your system does not work properly with the connections and settings listed above, your software may require differ-

ent settings. Check your software operation manual and set the HOST SELECT switch to the proper data transfer rate.

(Data transfer rate of “PC-1” is 31,250bps.)

MIDI OUT

MIDI

OUT

MIDI

OUT

MIDI

HOST SELECT

MIDI

THRU

MIDI

PC-2

Mac

PC-1

OUT IN

Windows Macintosh

Clavinova

(CLP-130)

MIDI interface

CLP-130/120 Connections

ENGLISH

3. Connecting the computer’s USB port to the Clavinova via a USB interface, such as

the UX256, UX96, or UX16

Connect the computer’s USB port to the USB interface (such as the UX256, UX96, or UX16) using a USB cable. Install

the driver (that came with the USB interface) on the computer, and connect the USB interface to the Clavinova using a

serial cable or MIDI cables.

For more information, refer to the instruction manual for the USB interface.

An example of connecting the USB interface to the Clavinova using a serial cable

An example of connecting the USB interface to the Clavinova using MIDI cables

TO HOST HOST SELECT

PC-1

Mac

MASTER VOLUME

BRILLIANCE

DEMO METRONOME

TEMPO

FUNCTION

TEMPO

OTHER VALUE

MELLOW BRIGHT

START

STOP

TEMPO

FUNCTION

MIN MAX

—

NO +

YES PRESET

USER 1

USER 2

TRACK

START

STOP

REC

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

E.PIANO

STRINGS

E.PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

VIBRA-

PHONE

CHOIR GUITAR E.BASS SPLIT

ROOM

HALL 1

HALL 2

STAGE

CHORUS

PHASER

TREMOLO

DELAY

HARD

MEDIUM

SOFT

VARIATION

GRAND

PIANO 2

JAZZ

ORGAN

WOOD

BASS

USER 3

VOICE

REVERB EFFECT TOUCH TRANSPOSE

SONG

POWER

USB interface

Clavinova

USB cable

computer

Standard Machintosh 8-pin system peripheral cable

HOST SELECT

MIDI

OUT IN

MASTER VOLUME

BRILLIANCE

DEMO METRONOME

TEMPO

FUNCTION

TEMPO

OTHER VALUE

MELLOW BRIGHT

START

STOP

TEMPO

FUNCTION

MIN MAX

—

NO +

YES PRESET

USER 1

USER 2

TRACK

START

STOP

REC

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

E.PIANO

STRINGS

E.PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

VIBRA-

PHONE

CHOIR GUITAR E.BASS SPLIT

ROOM

HALL 1

HALL 2

STAGE

CHORUS

PHASER

TREMOLO

DELAY

HARD

MEDIUM

SOFT

VARIATION

GRAND

PIANO 2

JAZZ

ORGAN

WOOD

BASS

USER 3

VOICE

REVERB EFFECT TOUCH TRANSPOSE

SONG

POWER

USB cable

MIDI cables

Clavinova

USB interface

computer

CLP-130/120

Troubleshooting

ENGLISH

Troubleshooting

Options

BC-100 Bench

A comfortable bench styled to match your Yamaha Clavinova.

HPE-160 Stereo Headphones

High-performance lightweight dynamic headphones with extra-soft ear pads.

Problem Possible Cause and Solution

The Clavinova does not turn on. The Clavinova has not been plugged in properly. Securely insert the female plug into

the socket on the Clavinova, and the male plug into a proper AC outlet (page 11).

A click or pop is heard when the power is

turned on or off.

This is normal when electrical current is being applied to the instrument.

Noise is heard from the speakers or head-

phones.

The noise may be due to interference caused by the use of a mobile phone in close

proximity to the Clavinova. Turn off the mobile phone, or use it further away from the

Clavinova.

The overall volume is low, or no sound is

heard.

• The Master Volume is set too low; set it to an appropriate level using the [MASTER

VOLUME] control.

• Make sure a pair of headphones is not connected to the headphones jack (when the

SPEAKER switch is set to the “NORMAL” position). If the SPEAKER switch is set to

the “OFF” position, set it to “NORMAL” or “ON” (page 12).

• Make sure that Local Control (page 46) is ON.

The speakers do not switch off when a pair of

headphones is connected.

The SPEAKER switch may be switched “ON.” Set the SPEAKER switch to the “NOR-

MAL” position (page 12).

The damper pedal has no effect, or the sound

continuously sustains even when the damper

pedal is not pressed.

The pedal cable/plug may not be properly connected. Make sure to securely insert the

pedal plug into the proper jack (pages 57–62).

TIP

If appears on the display, an internal malfunction has occurred. In this case, contact your Yamaha dealer.

CLP-130/120

Troubleshooting/Options

CLP-130/120

CLP-120: Keyboard Stand Assembly

ENGLISH

CLP-120: Keyboard Stand Assembly

CAUTION

• Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct direction. Please assemble in accor-

dance with the sequence given below.

• Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons.

• Be sure to use the correct screw size, as indicated below. Use of incorrect screws can cause damage.

• Be sure to tighten up all screws upon completing assembly of each unit.

• To disassemble, reverse the assembly sequence given below.

Remove the following parts from the package.

Attach the side panels to the pedal box.

Attach the rear panel.

Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver ready.

TIP

A headphone hanger is included in the CLP-120 package.

You can attach a headphone hanger on the Clavinova to

hang the headphones (page 12).

Assembly Parts

6 × 25 mm long screws ×4 1

4 × 12 mm thin screws ×2

Cord holders × 2

6 × 16 mm short screws ×4

20 mm tapping screws

Pedal box

Rear panel

Main unit

Side

panel

(left)

Side

panel

(right)

Bundled pedal

cord inside

AC power cord

Side panel

(left)

Side panel

(right)

(1) Untie and straighten

out the bundled cord

attached to the bot-

tom of the pedal box.

Don’t discard the

vinyl tie, you’ll need it

later in step 5.

(2) Use the four 6×25 mm long

screws 1 to attach the

pedal box. First attach one

side panel, then attach the

other side panel.

(2) Secure the top of the

rear panel to the side

panel brackets using two

4×12 mm thin screws 3.

(3) Secure the bottom

of the rear panel to

the pedal box using

four 4×20 mm tap-

ping screws 4.

(1) Place the bot-

tom edges of the rear

panel on the feet’s pro-

truding edges, with the

panel slightly angled

as shown in the illus-

tration.

Then, align the top part

of the panel with the

side panels.

CLP-130/120 CLP-120: Keyboard Stand Assembly

ENGLISH

3. Mount the main unit.

CAUTION

• Fingers can become pinched between the main

unit and the rear or side panels, be extra careful

so as not to drop the main unit.

• Do not hold the keyboard in any position other

than the position shown in the illustration.

4. Fix the main unit.

5. Connect the pedal cord.

6. Set the voltage selector and connect the

power cord.

Voltage Selector

Before connecting the AC power cord, check the setting

of the voltage selector which is provided in some areas.

To set the selector for 110V, 127V, 220V or 240V main

voltages, use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the selector

dial so that the correct voltage for your region appears

next to the pointer on the panel. The voltage selector is

set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. After the

proper voltage has been selected, connect the AC power

cord to the AC INLET and an AC wall outlet. A plug

adaptor may be also provided in some areas to match the

pin conﬁguration of the AC wall outlets in your area.

WARNING

An improper voltage setting can cause serious

damage to the Clavinova or result in improper

operation.

Be sure to place your hands at least 10 cm

from either end of the main unit when positioning it.

At least

10 cm

(1) Center the main unit to pro-

duce equal clearance on

the left and right sides.

(2) Use 6x16 mm short screws

2 to secure the main unit

from the front.

PEDAL

(1) Insert the pedal cord plug to the

pedal connector from the front.

(3) Use a vinyl tie

to take up any

slack in the

pedal cord.

(2) Attach the cord holders to

the rear panel as shown,

then clip the cord into the

holders.

240

127

110

220

CLP-130/120

CLP-120: Keyboard Stand Assembly

ENGLISH

Set the adjuster.

After completing the assembly, please

check the following.

When moving the instrument after assembly, always

hold the bottom of the main unit.

CAUTION

Do not hold the key cover or top portion. Improper

handling can result in damage to the instrument or

personal injury.

• Are there any parts left over?

➝

Review the assembly procedure and correct any

errors.

• Is the Clavinova clear of doors and other mov-

able ﬁxtures?

➝

Move the Clavinova to an appropriate location.

• Does the Clavinova make a rattling noise when

you shake it?

➝

Tighten all screws.

• Does the pedal box rattle or give way when you

step on the pedals?

➝

Turn the adjuster so that it is set ﬁrmly against

the ﬂoor.

• Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely

into the sockets?

➝

Check the connection.

• If the main unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady

when you play on the keyboard, refer to the

assembly diagrams and retighten all screws.

Rotate the adjuster until it comes in ﬁrm contact with the

ﬂoor surface.

Key cover

Top portion

CLP-130/120

CLP-130: Keyboard Stand Assembly

ENGLISH

CLP-130: Keyboard Stand Assembly

CAUTION

• Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct direction. Please assemble in accor-

dance with the sequence given below.

• Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons.

• Be sure to use the correct screw size, as indicated below. Use of incorrect screws can cause damage.

• Be sure to tighten up all screws upon completing assembly of each unit.

• To disassemble, reverse the assembly sequence given below.

Remove the following parts from the package.

Attach the side panels to the pedal box.

Attach the rear panel.

Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver ready.

TIP

A headphone hanger is included in the CLP-130 package.

You can attach a headphone hanger on the Clavinova to

hang the headphones (page 12).

Assembly Parts

6 × 25 mm long screws ×4 1

4 × 12 mm thin screws ×2

Cord holders × 2

6 × 16 mm short screws ×4

20 mm tapping screws

Pedal box

Rear panel

Main unit

Side

panel

(left)

Side

panel

(right)

Bundled pedal

cord inside

AC power cord

Side panel

(left)

Side panel

(right)

(1) Untie and straighten

out the bundled cord

attached to the bot-

tom of the pedal box.

Don’t discard the

vinyl tie, you’ll need it

later in step 5.

(2) Use the four 6×25 mm long

screws 1 to attach the

pedal box. First attach one

side panel, then attach the

other side panel.

(2) Secure the top of the

rear panel to the side

panel brackets using two

4×12 mm thin screws 3.

(3) Secure the bottom

of the rear panel to

the pedal box using

four 4×20 mm tap-

ping screws 4.

(1) Place the bot-

tom edges of the rear

panel on the feet’s pro-

truding edges, with the

panel slightly angled

as shown in the illus-

tration.

Then, align the top part

of the panel with the

side panels.

CLP-130/120 CLP-130: Keyboard Stand Assembly

ENGLISH

3. Mount the main unit.

CAUTION

• Fingers can become pinched between the main

unit and the rear or side panels, be extra careful

so as not to drop the main unit.

• Do not hold the keyboard in any position other

than the position shown in the illustration.

4. Fix the main unit.

5. Connect the pedal cord.

6. Set the voltage selector and connect the

power cord.

Voltage Selector

Before connecting the AC power cord, check the setting

of the voltage selector which is provided in some areas.

To set the selector for 110V, 127V, 220V or 240V main

voltages, use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the selector

dial so that the correct voltage for your region appears

next to the pointer on the panel. The voltage selector is

set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. After the

proper voltage has been selected, connect the AC power

cord to the AC INLET and an AC wall outlet. A plug

adaptor may be also provided in some areas to match the

pin conﬁguration of the AC wall outlets in your area.

WARNING

An improper voltage setting can cause serious

damage to the Clavinova or result in improper

operation.

Be sure to place your hands at least 10 cm

from either end of the main unit when positioning it.

At least

10 cm

(1) Center the main unit to pro-

duce equal clearance on

the left and right sides.

(2) Use 6x16 mm short screws

2 to secure the main unit

from the front.

PEDAL

(1) Insert the pedal cord plug to the

pedal connector from the front.

(3) Use a vinyl tie

to take up any

slack in the

pedal cord.

(2) Attach the cord holders to

the rear panel as shown,

then clip the cord into the

holders.

240

127

110

220

CLP-130/120

CLP-130: Keyboard Stand Assembly

ENGLISH

Set the adjuster.

After completing the assembly, please

check the following.

When moving the instrument after assembly, always

hold the bottom of the main unit.

CAUTION

Do not hold the key cover or top portion. Improper

handling can result in damage to the instrument or

personal injury.

• Are there any parts left over?

➝

Review the assembly procedure and correct any

errors.

• Is the Clavinova clear of doors and other mov-

able ﬁxtures?

➝

Move the Clavinova to an appropriate location.

• Does the Clavinova make a rattling noise when

you shake it?

➝

Tighten all screws.

• Does the pedal box rattle or give way when you

step on the pedals?

➝

Turn the adjuster so that it is set ﬁrmly against

the ﬂoor.

• Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely

into the sockets?

➝

Check the connection.

• If the main unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady

when you play on the keyboard, refer to the

assembly diagrams and retighten all screws.

Rotate the adjuster until it comes in ﬁrm contact with the

ﬂoor surface.

Key cover

Top portion

CLP-130/120 Preset Voice List

ENGLISH

Preset Voice List

CLP-130

Voice Name

Stereo

Sampling

Touch

Response

Dynamic

Sampling

Key-Off

Sampling

Voice Descriptions

GRANDPIANO 1

Recorded samples from a full concert grand piano. Also

includes three levels of dynamic sampling, sustain samples,

and key-off samples for exceptionally realistic acoustic

grand piano sound. Perfect for classical compositions as

well as any other style that requires acoustic piano.

VARIATION

Warm and mellow piano. Good for classical compositions.

GRANDPIANO 2

Spacious and clear piano with bright reverb. Good for popu-

lar music.

VARIATION

Bright, spacious piano. Good for popular or rock music.

E.PIANO 1

An electronic piano sound created by FM synthesis.

Extremely “musical” response with varying timbre according

to keyboard dynamics. Good for standard popular music.

VARIATION

A synth-generated type electronic piano sound often heard

in popular music. Used in the DUAL mode it blends well with

an acoustic piano voice.

E.PIANO 2

The sound of an electric piano using hammer-struck metallic

“tines”. Soft tone when played lightly, and an aggressive

tone when played hard.

VARIATION

A slightly different electric piano sound often heard in rock

and popular music.

HARPSICHORD

The deﬁnitive instrument for baroque music. Since harpsi-

chord uses plucked strings, there is no touch response.

There is, however, a characteristic additional sound when

the keys are released.

VARIATION

Mixes the same voice an octave higher for a more brilliant

tone.

E. CLAVICHORD

A hammer-struck keyboard instrument that utilizes an elec-

tric pickup that is often heard in funk and soul music. Its tone

is noted for the unique sound produced when the keys are

released.

VARIATION

Includes a unique preset effect.

VIBRAPHONE

Vibraphone played with relatively soft mallets. The tone

becomes more metallic the harder you play.

VARIATION

Stereo-sampled, spacious, and realistic marimba.

CHURCH ORGAN

This is a typical pipe organ sound (8 feet + 4 feet + 2 feet).

Good for sacred music from the Baroque period.

VARIATION

This is the organ's full coupler sound often associated with

Beach’s “Toccata and Fugue”.

JAZZ ORGAN

The sound of a “tonewheel” type electric organ. Often heard

in jazz and rock idioms.

VARIATION

Uses a rotary speaker effect with a different speed. The vari-

ations speed is faster. If the variation is selected while hold-

ing a chord, the speed of the effect will gradually change.

STRINGS

Stereo-sampled, large-scale strings ensemble with realistic

reverb. Try combining this voice with piano in the DUAL

mode.

VARIATION

Spacious strings ensemble with a slow attack. Try combining

this voice with a piano or electric piano in the DUAL mode.

CHOIR

A big, spacious choir voice. Perfect for creating rich harmo-

nies in slow pieces.

VARIATION

A choir voice with a slow attack. Try combining this voice

with a piano or electric piano in the DUAL mode.

CLP-130/120 Preset Voice List

ENGLISH

GUITAR

Warm and natural-sounding nylon guitar. Enjoy the quiet

ambience of nylon strings.

VARIATION

Bright, brilliant steel guitar. Suitable for popular music.

WOOD BASS

An upright bass played ﬁngerstyle. Ideal for jazz and Latin

music.

VARIATION

Adds a cymbal voice to the bass sound. Ideal for walking

bass lines in jazz tunes.

E.BASS

Electric bass for a wide range of music styles, jazz, rock,

popular, and more.

VARIATION

A fretless bass good for styles such as jazz, fusion, etc.

*1. Dynamic Sampling provides multiple velocity-switched samples to accurately simulate the timbral response of

an acoustic instrument.

*2. Contains a very subtle sample that is produced when the keys are released.

Voice Name

Stereo

Sampling

Touch

Response

Dynamic

Sampling

Key-Off

Sampling

Voice Descriptions

CLP-130/120 Preset Voice List

ENGLISH

CLP-120

Voice Name

Stereo

Sampling

Touch

Response

Dynamic

Sampling

Key-Off

Sampling

Voice Descriptions

GRANDPIANO 1

Recorded samples from a full concert grand piano. Perfect

for classical compositions as well as any other style that

requires acoustic piano.

GRANDPIANO 2

Spacious and clear piano with bright reverb. Good for popu-

lar music.

E.PIANO 1

An electronic piano sound created by FM synthesis. Good

for standard popular music.

E.PIANO 2

The sound of an electric piano using hammer-struck metallic

“tines”. Soft tone when played lightly, and an aggressive

tone when played hard.

HARPSICHORD 1

The deﬁnitive instrument for baroque music. Since harpsi-

chord uses plucked strings, there is no touch response.

There is, however, a characteristic additional sound when

the keys are released.

HARPSICHORD 2

Mixes the same voice an octave higher for a more brilliant

tone.

VIBRAPHONE

Vibraphone played with relatively soft mallets. The tone

becomes more metallic the harder you play.

CHURCH ORGAN 1

This is a typical pipe organ sound (8 feet + 4 feet + 2 feet).

Good for sacred music from the Baroque period.

CHURCH ORGAN 2

This is the organ's full coupler sound often associated with

Beach’s “Toccata and Fugue”.

JAZZ ORGAN

The sound of a “tonewheel” type electric organ. Often heard

in jazz and rock idioms.

STRINGS 1

Stereo-sampled, large-scale strings ensemble with realistic

reverb. Try combining this voice with piano in the DUAL

mode.

STRINGS 2

Spacious strings ensemble with a slow attack. Try combining

this voice with a piano or electric piano in the DUAL mode.

CHOIR

A big, spacious choir voice. Perfect for creating rich harmo-

nies in slow pieces.

GUITAR

Warm and natural-sounding nylon guitar. Enjoy the quiet

ambience of nylon strings.

*1. Dynamic Sampling provides multiple velocity-switched samples to accurately simulate the timbral response of

an acoustic instrument.

*2. Contains a very subtle sample that is produced when the keys are released.

CLP-130/120 Demo Song List

ENGLISH

Demo Song List

The demonstration pieces listed above are short rearranged excerpts the original compositions.

Piano Voice Demo Description (CLP-130)

Voice Name CLP-130 CLP-120 Title Composer

GRAND PIANO1

Consolation No.3 F. Liszt

HARPSICHORD

Gavotte

J.S. Bach

HARPSICHORD1

HARPSICHORD2

Invention No.1

Voice Name Piano Voice Demo

GRAND PIANO1 Stereo sampling

GRAND PIANO2 Monaural sampling

E.PIANO1 Dynamic sampling; mezzo piano

E.PIANO2 Dynamic sampling; mezzo forte

HARPSICHORD Dynamic sampling; forte

E.CLAVICHORD With sustain sampling

VIBRAPHONE Without sustain sampling

CHURCH ORGAN

With key-off sampling

JAZZ ORGAN

Without key-off sampling

CLP-130/120

Index

ENGLISH

Index

Numerics

50 Greats for the Piano ...................................................17

50 Piano Preset Songs .....................................................17

A-B Repeat for 50 Preset Songs ......................................20

Accessories.........................................................................8

Adding Variations ...........................................................22

Adjust

Brilliance ..............................................................16, 22

Tempo (50 Piano Preset Songs) ...............................17

Tempo (Recorded Songs) .........................................35

Volume (50 Piano Preset Songs) ..............................17

Volume (Demo) ........................................................16

Volume (Metronome) ..............................................45

ALL (LED display) ..........................................................17

Assembly....................................................................57–62

AUX IN ......................................................................14, 51

AUX OUT..................................................................14, 50

Backup Functions............................................................48

BRILLIANCE.............................................................14, 22

Center Pedal ..............................................................15, 22

Combining Two Voices (Dual mode)............................26

Connecting a Personal Computer..................................52

Connections.....................................................................50

Connectors ......................................................................50

Damper Pedal ......................................................15, 21, 43

DEMO........................................................................14, 16

Demo Song List ...............................................................66

Detailed Settings (FUNCTION).....................................37

Dual mode .................................................................26, 42

EFFECT......................................................................14, 23

Factory Setting List .........................................................70

Fine Tuning of the Pitch.................................................40

FUL (LED display)..........................................................31

FUNCTION ........................................................14, 40–48

Basic Procedure.........................................................38

Function Parameter List .................................................70

HOST SELECT.................................................... 15, 51, 54

HST (LED display).......................................................... 52

Key Cover ........................................................................10

LED display ..................................................................... 14

Left Pedal ............................................................. 15, 22, 44

List

Demo Song ................................................................66

Factory Setting........................................................... 70

Functions................................................................... 37

Preset Voice .........................................................63–65

MASTER VOLUME..................................................11, 14

METRONOME .........................................................14, 29

Metronome Volume .......................................................45

MIDI ................................................................................49

MIDI [IN] [OUT] [THRU] .....................................15, 51

MIDI cables ......................................................... 49, 54, 55

MIDI connectors....................................................... 49, 54

MIDI Data Format..........................................................71

MIDI driver .....................................................................53

MIDI Functions ..............................................................45

Music Rest ....................................................................... 10

Normal setting ................................................................22

CLP-130/120 Index

ENGLISH

PEDAL jack................................................................14, 51

PHONES....................................................................12, 15

Piano Voice Demo Description......................................66

Pitch ➝ Fine Tuning of the Pitch...................................40

POWER......................................................................11, 14

Practicing a One-Hand Part Using 50 Preset Songs......18

Precautions ....................................................................6–7

PRESET......................................................................14, 17

Preset Song Part...............................................................45

Preset songs ➝ 50 Piano Preset Songs ...........................17

Preset Voice List ........................................................63–65

REC ➝ Recording .....................................................14, 31

Recording.........................................................................30

Initial Settings............................................................34

Re-recording....................................................................32

REVERB.....................................................................14, 22

Right Pedal.................................................................15, 21

rnd (LED display)............................................................17

Scale..................................................................................41

Scn (LED display)............................................................56

Serial cable .................................................................53, 55

Soft Pedal .............................................................15, 22, 44

Sostenute Pedal..........................................................15, 22

SPEAKER...................................................................12, 15

Specifications...................................................................76

SPLIT (CLP-130).................................................14, 27, 43

START/STOP (Demo)....................................................16

START/STOP (METRONOME)..............................14, 29

Start/Stop (Pedal)............................................................36

START/STOP (SONG) ...................................................14

Start/Stop playback

50 Piano Preset Songs................................................17

Demonstration Tunes ...............................................16

Recorded Songs .........................................................35

Useful Playback Functions........................................36

Start/Stop recording........................................................31

Sustain Pedal....................................................................44

Synchro Start

50 Piano Preset Songs................................................19

Recorded Songs .........................................................36

TEMPO................................................................ 14, 17, 35

TEMPO (METRONOME) .............................................29

TO HOST .................................................................. 15, 49

TOUCH.....................................................................14, 24

Touch Sensitivity.............................................................24

Track Playback On and Off ............................................ 36

TRACK1/2 (50 Piano Preset Songs) ..............................18

TRACK1/2 (Recording)..................................................31

Transporting .....................................................................8

TRANSPOSE.............................................................14, 25

Troubleshooting.............................................................. 56

Tuning ➝ Fine Tuning of the Pitch...............................40

USB ..................................................................................55

USER 1/2/3 (CLP-130) ...................................................30

VARIATION (CLP-130) ................................................22

VOICE .......................................................................14, 21

CLP-130/120

Appendix

This section introduces reference material.

In diesem Abschnitt ﬁnden Sie Referenzmaterial.

Cette section présente le matériel de référence.

En esta sección se incluye material de referencia.

Factory Setting List / Liste der Vorgabeeinstellungen / Liste des réglages / Lista de ajustes de fábrica.............. 70

MIDI Data Format / MIDI-Datenformat / Format des données MIDI / Formato de datos MIDI................... 71

MIDI Implementation Chart / MIDI Implementierung stabelle /

Feuille d’implantation MIDI / Gráﬁca de implementación MIDI ................................................................... 75

Speciﬁcations / Technische Daten / Caractéristiques techniques / Especiﬁcaciones .......................................... 76

CLP-130/120 Appendix

Factory Setting List / Liste der Vorgabeeinstellungen /

Liste des réglages / Lista de ajustes de fábrica

Function

Backup Group

CLP-130 CLP-120

Voice GRAND PIANO 1

F9.1 F8.1

Variation (CLP-130) OFF

Dual Mode OFF

Split Mode (CLP-130) OFF

Split Mode Left Voice (CLP-130) WOOD BASS

Reverb Type Preset for each voice

Reverb Depth Preset for each voice

Effect Type Preset for each voice

Effect Depth Preset for each voice

Touch Sensitivity MEDIUM

Volume in the FIXED Mode 64

Metronome OFF ——

Metronome Time Signature 0 (no accent) F9.1 F8.1

Tempo 120 ——

Transpose 0 F9.3 F8.3

CLP-130 CLP-120 Function Default

Backup Group

CLP-130 CLP-120

F1 F1 Tuning A3=440Hz

F9.3 F8.3F2.1 F2.1 Scale 1 (Equal Temperament)

F2.2 F2.2 Base Note C

F3.1 F3.1 Dual Balance Preset for each voice combination

F9.1 F8.1

F3.2 F3.2 Dual Detune Preset for each voice combination

F3.3, F3.4 F3.3, F3.4 Dual Octave Shift Preset for each voice combination

F3.5, F.3.6 F3.5, F.3.6 Dual Effect Depth Preset for each voice combination

F4.1 — Split Point F



F4.2 — Split Balance Preset for each voice combination

F4.3, F4.4 — Split Octave Shift Preset for each voice combination

F4.5, F4.6 — Split Effect Depth Preset for each voice combination

F4.7 — Damper Pedal Range ALL

F5.1 F4.1 Left Pedal Mode 1 (Soft Pedal)

F9.4 F8.4

F5.2 F4.2 Soft Pedal Effect Depth 3

F5.3 — Sustain Sample Depth 12

F5.4 — Keyoff Sample Volume 10

F6 F5 Metronome Volume 10

F9.1 F8.1

F7 F6 Preset Song Part Cancel Volume 5

F8.1 F7.1 MIDI Transmit Channel 1

F9.2 F8.2

F8.2 F7.2 MIDI Receive Channel ALL

F8.3 F7.3 Local Control ON

F8.4 F7.4 Program Change Send & Receive ON

F8.5 F7.5 Control Change Send & Receive ON

F8.6 F7.6 MIDI Transmit Transpose 0

F9 F8 Backup All OFF Always backed up

CLP-130/120 Appendix

MIDI Data Format / MIDI-Datenformat /

Format des données MIDI / Formato de datos MIDI

If you’re already very familiar with MIDI, or are using a

computer to control your music hardware with computer-

gener-ated MIDI messages, the data provided in this section

can help you to control the CLP-130/120.

Falls Sie bereits mit MIDI vertraut sind oder einen

Computer zur Erzeugung von MIDI-Steuermeldungen für die

Instrumente verwenden, können Sie sich zur Steuerung des

CLP-130/120 nach den im folgenden Abschnitt aufgeführten

Speziﬁkationen richten.

Si vous êtes très familier avec l’interface MIDI ou si vous

utilisez un ordinateur pour commander votre matériel de

musique au moyen de messages MIDI générés par

ordinateur, les données suivantes vous seront utiles et vous

aideront à commander le CLP-130/120.

SI usted está ya familiarizado con MIDI, o si emplea una

computadora para controlar sus aparatos musicales con

mensajes MIDI generados por computadora, los datos

proporcionados en esta sección le ayudarán a controlar la

CLP-130/120.

1. NOTE ON/OFF

Data format: [9nH] -> [kk] -> [vv]

9nH = Note ON/OFF event (n = channel number)

kk = Note number (Transmit: 09H ~ 78H = A-2 ~ C8 /

Receive: 00H ~ 7FH = C-2 ~ G8)*

vv = Velocity (Key ON = 01H ~ 7FH, Key OFF = 00H)

Data format: [8nH] -> [kk] -> [vv] (reception only)

8nH = Note OFF event (n = channel number)

kk = Note number: 00H ~ 7FH = C-2 ~ G8

vv = Velocity

* If received value exceeds the supported range for the

selected voice, the note is adjusted by the necessary num-

ber of octaves.

2. CONTROL CHANGE

Data format: [BnH] -> [cc] -> [vv]

BnH = Control change (n = channel number)

cc = Control number

vv = Data Range

(1) Bank Select

ccH Parameter Data Range (vvH)

00H Bank Select MSB 00H:Normal

20H Bank Select LSB 00H...7FH

Bank selection processing does not occur until receipt of

next Program Change message.

(2) Main Volume (reception only)

ccH Parameter Data Range (vvH)

07H Volume MSB 00H...7FH

(3) Expression

ccH Parameter Data Range (vvH)

0BH Expression MSB 00H...7FH

(4) Damper

ccH Parameter Data Range (vvH)

40H Damper MSB 00H...7FH

(5) Sostenuto

ccH Parameter Data Range (vvH)

42H Sostenuto 00H-3FH:off, 40H-7FH:on

(6) Soft Pedal

ccH Parameter Data Range (vvH)

43H Soft Pedal 00H-3FH:off, 40H-7FH:on

(7) Effect1 Depth (Reverb Send Level)

ccH Parameter Data Range (vvH)

5BH Effect1 Depth 00H...7FH

Adjusts the reverb send level.

(8) Effect4 Depth (Variation Effect Send Level)

ccH Parameter Data Range (vvH)

5EH Effect4 Depth 00H...7FH

3. MODE MESSAGES

Data format: [BnH] -> [cc] -> [vv]

BnH = Control event (n = channel number)

cc = Control number

vv = Data Range

(1) All Sound Off

ccH Parameter Data Range (vvH)

78H All Sound Off 00H

Switches off all sound from the channel. Does not reset Note

On and Hold On conditions established by Channel Messages.

(2) Reset All Controllers

ccH Parameter Data Range (vvH)

79H Reset All Controllers 00H

Resets controllers as follows.

Controller Value

Expression 127 (max)

Damper Pedal 0 (off)

Sostenuto 0 (off)

Soft Pedal 0 (off)

(3) Local Control (reception only)

ccH Parameter Data Range (vvH)

7AH Local Control 00H (off), 7FH (on)

(4) All Notes Off

ccH Parameter Data Range (vvH)

7BH All Notes Off 00H

Switches OFF all the notes that are currently ON on the spec-

iﬁed channel. Any notes being held by the damper or soste-

nuto pedal will continue to sound until the pedal is released.

(5) Omni Off (reception only)

ccH Parameter Data Range (vvH)

7CH Omni Off 00H

Same processing as for All Notes Off.

(6) Omni On (reception only)

ccH Parameter Data Range (vvH)

7DH Omni On 00H

Same processing as for All Notes Off.

(7) Mono (reception only)

ccH Parameter Data Range (vvH)

7EH Mono 00H

Same processing as for All Sound Off.

(8) Poly (reception only)

ccH Parameter Data Range (vvH)

7FH Poly 00H

Same processing as for All Sound Off.

• When control change reception is turned OFF in the Function

mode, control change data will not be transmitted or received

except for Bank Select and Mode messages.

• Local on/off, OMNI on/off are not transmitted. (The appropriate

note off number is supplied with “All Note Off” transmission).

• When a voice bank MSB/LSB is received, the number is

stored in the internal buffer regardless of the received order,

then the stored value is used to select the appropriate voice

when a program change message is received.

• The Multi-timbre and Poly modes are always active. No

change occurs when OMNI ON, OMNI OFF, MONO, or POLY

mode messages are received.

CLP-130/120 Appendix

4. PROGRAM CHANGE

Data format: [CnH] -> [ppH]

CnH = Program event (n = channel number)

ppH = Program change number

P.C.#=Program Change number

• When program change reception is turned OFF in the Func-

tion mode, no program change data is transmitted or

received. Also, Bank MSB/LSB is not transmitted or received.

5. SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGES

[rrH]

F8H: Timing clock

FAH: Start

FCH: Stop

FEH: Active sensing

• Caution: If an error occurs during MIDI reception, the Damper,

Sostenuto, and Soft effects for all channels are turned off and

an All Note Off occurs.

6. SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGES

(Yamaha MIDI Format)

Panel Data Transmit

Data format: [F0H] -> [43H] -> [0nH] -> [7CH] -> ... -> [F7H]

F0H, 43H, 0nH, 7CH (n: channel number)

00H, 2DH (data length)

43H, 4CH, 20H, 20H (CL)

43H, 4CH, 50H, 27H, 30H, 32H (CLP02)

30H, 30H (version x, y)

[PANEL DATA]

[CHECK SUM (1byte)] = 0-(43H+4CH+20H+......+Data end)

F7H

• Panel Data Contents

• Panel data send requests cannot be received.

7. SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGES

(Universal System Exclusive)

(1) Universal Realtime Message

Data format: [F0H] -> [7FH] -> [XnH] -> [04H] -> [01H] ->

[llH] -> [mmH] -> [F7H]

MIDI Master Volume

• Simultaneously changes the volume of all channels.

• When a MIDI master volume message is received, the volume

only has affect on the MIDI receive channel, not the panel

master vol-ume.

F0H = Exclusive status

7FH = Universal Realtime

7FH = ID of target device

04H = Sub-ID #1=Device Control Message

01H = Sub-ID #2=Master Volume

llH = Volume LSB

mmH =

Volume MSB

F7H = End of Exclusive

F0H = Exclusive status

7FH = Universal Realtime

XnH = When n is received n=0~F, whichever is received.

X = don’t care

04H = Sub-ID #1=Device Control Message

01H = Sub-ID #2=Master Volume

llH = Volume LSB

mmH =

Volume MSB

F7H = End of Exclusive

CLP-130 CLP-120 MSB LSB

P.C.#

GRANDPIANO 1 GRANDPIANO 1 0 122 0

VARIATION — 0 123 0

GRANDPIANO 2 GRANDPIANO 2 0 112 0

VARIATION — 0 112 1

E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 1 0 122 5

VARIATION — 0 122 88

E.PIANO 2 E.PIANO 2 0 122 4

VARIATION — 0 123 4

HARPSICHORD HARPSICHORD 1 0 122 6

VARIATION HARPSICHORD 2 0 123 6

E. CLAVICHORD — 0 122 7

VARIATION — 0 123 7

VIBRAPHONE VIBRAPHONE 0 122 11

VARIATION — 0 122 12

CHURCH ORGAN CHURCH ORGAN 1 0 123 19

VARIATION CHURCH ORGAN 2 0 122 19

JAZZ ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN 0 122 16

VARIATION — 0 123 16

STRINGS STRINGS 1 0 122 48

VARIATION STRINGS 2 0 122 49

CHOIR CHOIR 0 122 52

VARIATION — 0 123 52

GUITAR GUITAR 0 122 24

VARIATION — 0 122 25

WOOD BASS — 0 122 32

VARIATION — 0 124 32

E.BASS — 0 122 33

VARIATION — 0 122 35

Data Transmission Reception

F8H

Transmitted every

96 clocks

Received as 96-clock tempo timing

when MIDI clock is set to External

FAH Recorder start

Recorder start

Not received when the MIDI clock is

set to Internal.

FCH Recorder stop

Recorder stop

Not received when the MIDI clock is

set to Internal.

FEH

Transmitted every

200 milliseconds

If a signal is not received via MIDI for

more than 400 milliseconds, the

same processing will take place for

All Sound Off, All Notes Off and Reset

All Controllers as when those signals

are received.

(1) 1'st Voice

(2) Dual On/Off

(3) Dual Voice

(4) Dual Balance

(5) Dual Detune

(6) Dual Voice1 Octave

(7) Dual Voice2 Octave

(8) Dual Voice1 Effect Depth

(9) Dual Voice2 Effect Depth

(10) Split On/Off

(11) Split Voice

(12) Split Point

(13) Split Balance

(14) Split Voice1 Octave

(15) Split Voice2 Octave

(16) Split Voice1 Effect Depth

(17) Split Voice2 Effect Depth

(18) Split Dumper Mode

(19) Reverb Type 1

(20) Reverb Type 2

(21) Reverb Depth 1

(22) Reverb Depth 2

(23) Effect Type 1

(24) Effect Type 2

(25) Effect Depth

(26) Variation On/Off

(27) Touch Sensitivity

(28) Fixed Data

(29) Left Pedal

(30) Soft Pedal Depth

(31) Absolute tempo low byte

(32) Absolute tempo high byte

(33) Key-Off Sampling Depth

CLP-130/120 Appendix

(2) Universal Non-Realtime Message (GM On)

General MIDI Mode On

Data format: [F0H] -> [7EH] -> [XnH] -> [09H] -> [01H] ->

[F7H]

F0H = Exclusive status

7EH = Universal Non-Realtime

7FH = ID of target device

09H = Sub-ID #1=General MIDI Message

01H = Sub-ID #2=General MIDI On

F7H = End of Exclusive

F0H = Exclusive status

7EH = Universal Non-Realtime

XnH = When received, n=0~F.

X = don’t care

09H = Sub-ID #1=General MIDI Message

01H = Sub-ID #2=General MIDI On

F7H = End of Exclusive

When the General MIDI mode ON message is received, the

MIDI system will be reset to its default settings.

This message requires approximately 50ms to execute, so

sufﬁ-cient time should be allowed before the next message is

sent.

8. SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGES (XG Standard)

(1) XG Native Parameter Change

Data format: [F0H] -> [43H] -> [1nH] -> [4CH] -> [hhH] ->

[mmH] -> [llH] -> [ddH] -> [F7H]

F0H = Exclusive status

43H = YAMAHA ID

1nH = When received, n=0~F.

When transmitted, n=0.

4CH = Model ID of XG

hhH = Address High

mmH =

Address Mid

llH = Address Low

ddH = Data

F7H = End of Exclusive

Data size must match parameter size (2 or 4 bytes).

When the XG System On message is received, the MIDI sys-

tem will be reset to its default settings.

The message requires approximately 50ms to execute, so

sufﬁcient time should be allowed before the next message is

sent.

(2) XG Native Bulk Data (reception only)

Data format: [F0H] -> [43H] -> [0nH] -> [4CH] -> [aaH] ->

[bbH] -> [hhH] -> [mmH] -> [llH] ->[ddH] ->...->

[ccH] -> [F7H]

F0H = Exclusive status

43H = YAMAHA ID

0nH = When received, n=0~F.

When transmitted, n=0.

4CH = Model ID of XG

aaH = ByteCount

bbH = ByteCount

hhH = Address High

mmH =

Address Mid

llH = Address Low

ddH = Data

| |

ccH = Check sum

F7H = End of Exclusive

• Receipt of the XG SYSTEM ON message causes reinitializa-

tion of relevant parameters and Control Change values. Allow

sufﬁcient time for processing to execute (about 50 msec)

before sending the CLP-130/120 another message.

• XG Native Parameter Change message may contain two or

four bytes of parameter data (depending on the parameter

size).

• For information about the Address and Byte Count values,

refer to Table 1 below. Note that the table’s Total Size value

gives the size of a bulk block. Only the top address of the

block (00H, 00H, 00H) is valid as a bulk data address.

9. SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGES

(Clavinova MIDI Format)

Data format:

[F0H] -> [43H] -> [73H] -> [xxH] -> [nnH] -> [F7H]

F0H = Exclusive status

43H = Yamaha ID

73H = Clavinova ID

01H = Product ID (CLP common)

7F= Extended Product ID

xxH = Product ID (CLP-130: 26H / CLP-120: 25H)

nnH = Substatus

nn Control

02H Internal MIDI clock

03H External MIDI clock

06H Bulk Data (the bulk data follows 06H)

F7H = End of Exclusive

* When nn=02H or 03H, Clavinova common ID (01H) is

rec-ognized as well as 75H.

BULK DUMP FORMAT

F0H, 43H, 73H

75F, xxH = Product ID (CLP-130: 26H /

CLP-120: 25H)

06H = Bulk ID

05H = Sequence data

0nH, 0nH, 0nH, 0nH, 0nH, 0nH, 0nH, 0nH = Data length

[BULK DATA] =

[CHECK SUM (1byte)] = 0-sum (BULK DATA)

F7H = End of Exclusive

10.

SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGES (Special Control)

Data format: [F0H] -> [43H] -> [73H] -> [66H] -> [11H] ->

[0nH] -> [ccH] -> [vvH] -> [F7H]

F0H = Exclusive status

43H = Yamaha ID

73H = Clavinova ID

7FH = Extended Product ID

xxH = Product ID (CLP-130: 26H / CLP-120: 25H)

11H = Special control

0nH = Control MIDI change (n=channel number)

cc = Control number

vv = Value

F7H = End of Exclusive

Control 0n ccH vvH

Split Point Always 00H 14H

14H : Split Key Numbe

Metronome Always 00H 1BH 00H : off

01H : –

02H : 2/4

03H : 3/4

04H : 4/4

05H : 5/4

06H : 6/4

7FH : No accent

Damper Level

ch: 00H-0FH 3DH(Sets the Damper Level

for each channel)

00H-7FH

Channel Detune

ch: 00H-0FH 43H (Sets the Detune value

for each channel)

00H-7FH

Voice Reserve

ch: 00H-0FH 45H 00H : Reserve off

7FH : on*

When Volume, Expression is received for Reserve On, they

will be effective from the next Key On. Reserve Off is normal.

11. SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGES (Others)

Data format:

[F0H] -> [43H] -> [1nH] -> [27H] -> [30H] -> [00H]

-> [00H] -> [mmH] -> [

H] -> [ccH] -> [F7H]

Master Tuning (XG and last message priority) simultaneously

changes the pitch of all channels.

F0H = Exclusive Status

43H = Yamaha ID

1nH = When received, n=0~F.

When transmitted, n=0.

27H = Model ID of TG100

30H = Sub ID

00H =

mmH = Master Tune MSB

llH = Master Tune LSB

ccH = don’t care (under 7FH)

F7H = End of Exclusive

CLP-130/120 Appendix

MIDI Parameter Change table (SYSTEM)

Address (H) Size (H) Data (H) Parameter Description Default value (H)

00 00 00 4 020C - 05F4(*1) MASTER TUNE -50 - +50[cent] 00 04 00 00

01 1st bit 3 - 0 ➝ bit 15 - 12 400

02 2nd bit 3 - 0 ➝ bit 11 - 8

03 3rd bit 3 - 0 ➝ bit 7 - 4

4th bit 3 - 0 ➝ bit 3 - 0

04 1 00 - 7F MASTER VOLUME 0 - 127 7F

05 1 ——

06 1 34 - 4C(*2) TRANSPOSE -12 - +12[semitones] 40

7E 00 XG SYSTEM ON 00=XG sytem ON

7F 00 RESET ALL PARAMETERS 00=ON (receive only)

TOTAL SIZE 07

*1: Values lower than 020CH select -50 cents. Values higher than 05F4H select +50 cents.

*2: Values from 28H through 33H are interpreted as -12 through -1. Values from 4DH through 58H are interpreted as +1 through +12.

MIDI Parameter Change table (EFFECT 1)

Refer to the “Effect MIDI Map” for a complete list of Reverb, Chorus and Variation type numbers.

Address (H) Size (H) Data (H) Parameter Description Default value (H)

02 01 00 2 00-7F REVERB TYPE MSB Refer to Effect MIDI Map 01(=HALL1)

00-7F REVERB TYPE LSB 00 : basic type 00

02 01 40 2 00-7F VARIATION TYPE MSB Refer to Effect MIDI Map 00(=Effect off)

00-7F VARIATION TYPE LSB 00 : basic type 00

• “VARIATION” refers to the EFFECT on the panel.

MIDI Parameter Change table (MULTI PART)

Address (H) Size (H) Data (H) Parameter Description Default value (H)

08 nn 11 1 00 - 7F DRY LEVEL 0 - 127 7F

nn = Part Number

• Effect MIDI Map

REVERB

MSB LSB

ROOM 02H 10H

HALL 1 01H 10H

HALL 2 01H 11H

STAGE 03H 10H

Sound board 03H 12H

EFFECT

MSB LSB

CHORUS 42H 10H

PHASER 48H 10H

TREMOLO 46H 10H

DELAY 05H 10H

CLP-130/120

Appendix

MIDI Implementation Chart

TransmittedFunction... Recognized Remarks

Basic

Channel

Note

Number : True voice

Velocity

After

Touch

Pitch Bend

Control

Change

Prog

Change : True #

System Exclusive

Common : Song Pos.

: Song Sel.

: Tune

System : Clock

Real Time : Commands

: All Sound Off

Aux :

Reset

All

Cntrls

: Local ON/OFF

Mes- : All Notes OFF

sages: Active Sense

: Reset

Notes: *1= Recieve Mode is always multi timbre and Poly mode.

Mode

Default

Changed

Note ON

Note OFF

Key's

Ch's

0,32

1 - 16

Ø 9nH,v=1-127

˛ 9nH,v=0

**************

9 - 120

**************

Mode 1 : OMNI ON , POLY Mode 2 : OMNI ON ,MONO

Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF,MONO

1 - 16

Ø 9nH,v=1-127

9nH,v=0 or 8nH

Ø (120,126,127)

Ø (121)

Ø (122)

Ø (123-125)

0 - 127

Ø : Yes

˛ : No

Default

Messages

Altered

Poly Mode only

YAMAHA [ Clavinova ] Date : 24,Oct 2001

Model CLP-130/120 MIDI Implementation Chart

Version : 1.0

Bank Select

Volume

Expression

Damper

Sostenuto

Soft pedal

Reverb Depth

Effect Depth

CLP-130/120

Appendix

Speciﬁcations / Technische Daten /

Caractéristiques techniques / Especiﬁcaciones

*Speciﬁcations and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change

or modify products or speciﬁcations at any time without prior notice. Since speciﬁcations, equipment or options may not be the

same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.

*Die technischen Daten und Beschreibungen in dieser Bedienungsanleitung dienen nur der Information. Yamaha Corp. behält sich

das Recht vor, Produkte oder deren technische Daten jederzeit ohne vorherige Ankündigung zu verändern oder zu modiﬁzieren. Da

die technischen Daten, das Gerät selbst oder Sonderzubehör nicht in jedem Land gleich sind, setzen Sie sich im Zweifel bitte mit

Ihrem Yamaha-Händler in Verbindung.

*Les caractéristiques techniques et les descriptions du mode d’emploi ne sont données que pour information. Yamaha Corp. se

réserve le droit de changer ou modiﬁer les produits et leurs caractéristiques techniques à tout moment sans aucun avis. Du fait que

les caractéristiques techniques, les équipements et les options peuvent différer d’un pays à l’autre, adressez-vous au distributeur

Yamaha le plus proche.

* Las especiﬁcaciones y descripciones de este manual del propietario tienen sólo el propósito de servir como información. Yamaha

Corp. se reserva el derecho a efectuar cambios o modiﬁcaciones en los productos o especiﬁcaciones en cualquier momento sin pre-

vio aviso. Puesto que las especiﬁcaciones, equipos u opciones pueden no ser las mismas en todos los mercados, solicite información

a su distribuidor Yamaha.

Item

CLP-130 CLP-120

Keyboard 88 keys (A-1 - C7)

Sound Source AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling AWM Stereo Sampling

Polyphony 64 Notes Max.

Voice Selection 14

2 variations for each voice 14

Effect Reverb, Effect, Brilliance

Volume Master Volume

Controls

Dual, Split, Metoronome, Transpose, Touch

(Hard/Midium/Soft/Fixed), Functions, Speaker

ON/OFF

Dual, Metoronome, Transpose, Touch (Hard/

Midium/Soft/Fixed), Functions, Speaker ON/

OFF

Recording/Playback

2-track recording/playback (CLP-130: 3/CLP-120: 1 user songs), Tempo Adjustment, Synchro

Start

Pedal Damper, Sostenuto, Soft

Demo Songs 14 voice Demo Songs, 50 preset Songs

Jacks/Connectors

MIDI (IN/OUT/THRU), PHONES

2, AUX IN, AUX OUT(L/L+R,R), AUX OUT (LEVEL

FIXED)(L,R), TO HOST

Main Ampliﬁers 40W

2 20W

Speakers 16cm

2, 5cm

2 16cm

Dimensions (W

(with music rest)

1370mm

518mm

850mm

[53 15/16"

20 3/8"

33 7/16"]

(1370mm

518mm

1020mm)

[53 15/16"

220 3/8"

40 1/8"]

1370mm

518mm

850mm

[53 15/16"

20 3/8"

33 7/16"]

(1370mm

518mm

1022mm)

[53 15/16"

220 3/8"

40 1/4"]

Weight 54kg (119lbs., 1oz) 51kg (112lbs., 7oz)

Accessories

Owner’s Manual, “50 greats for the Piano” (Music Book), Bench (included or optional depend-

ing on locale)

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

INFORMATION RELATING TO PERSONAL INJURY, ELECTRICAL SHOCK,

AND FIRE HAZARD POSSIBILITIES HAS BEEN INCLUDED IN THIS LIST.

WARNING- When using any electrical or electronic product,

basic precautions should always be followed. These precautions

include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Read all Safety Instructions, Installation Instructions, Spe-

cial Message Section items, and any Assembly Instructions

found in this manual BEFORE making any connections, includ-

ing connection to the main supply.

2. Main Power Supply Veriﬁcation: Yamaha products are

manufactured speciﬁcally for the supply voltage in the area

where they are to be sold. If you should move, or if any doubt

exists about the supply voltage in your area, please contact your

dealer for supply voltage veriﬁcation and (if applicable) instruc-

tions. The required supply voltage is printed on the name plate.

For name plate location, please refer to the graphic found in the

Special Message Section of this manual.

3. This product may be equipped with a polarized plug (one

blade wider than the other). If you are unable to insert the plug

into the outlet, turn the plug over and try again. If the problem

persists, contact an electrician to have the obsolete outlet

replaced. Do NOT defeat the safety purpose of the plug.

4. Some electronic products utilize external power supplies

or adapters. Do NOT connect this type of product to any power

supply or adapter other than one described in the owners manual,

on the name plate, or speciﬁcally recommended by Yamaha.

5. WARNING: Do not place this product or any other

objects on the power cord or place it in a position where anyone

could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connect-

ing cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recom-

mended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire

size for a 25’ cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the

AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For

longer extension cords, consult a local electrician.

6. Ventilation: Electronic products, unless speciﬁcally

designed for enclosed installations, should be placed in locations

that do not interfere with proper ventilation. If instructions for

enclosed installations are not provided, it must be assumed that

unobstructed ventilation is required.

7. Temperature considerations: Electronic products should

be installed in locations that do not signiﬁcantly contribute to

their operating temperature. Placement of this product close to

heat sources such as; radiators, heat registers and other devices

that produce heat should be avoided.

8. This product was NOT designed for use in wet/damp loca-

tions and should not be used near water or exposed to rain.

Examples of wet/damp locations are; near a swimming pool,

spa, tub, sink, or wet basement.

9. This product should be used only with the components

supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by the

manufacturer. If a cart, rack, or stand is used, please observe all

safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory

product.

10. The power supply cord (plug) should be disconnected

from the outlet when electronic products are to be left unused for

extended periods of time. Cords should also be disconnected

when there is a high probability of lightning and/or electrical

storm activity.

11. Care should be taken that objects do not fall and liquids are

not spilled into the enclosure through any openings that may exist.

12. Electrical/electronic products should be serviced by a

qualiﬁed service person when:

a. The power supply cord has been damaged; or

b. Objects have fallen, been inserted, or liquids have been

spilled into the enclosure through openings; or

c. The product has been exposed to rain: or

d. The product dose not operate, exhibits a marked change

in performance; or

e. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure of the

product has been damaged.

13. Do not attempt to service this product beyond that

described in the user-maintenance instructions. All other servic-

ing should be referred to qualiﬁed service personnel.

14. This product, either alone or in combination with an

ampliﬁer and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of pro-

ducing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss.

DO NOT operate for a long period of time at a high volume level

or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing

loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist.

IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period

before damage occurs.

15. Some Yamaha products may have benches and/or accessory

mounting ﬁxtures that are either supplied as a part of the product

or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be

dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are

stable and any optional ﬁxtures (where applicable) are well

secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are

designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended.

PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL

92-469-2

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B)

(2 wires)

• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music

(U.K.) Ltd.

(polarity)

• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music

Ltd.

• Ceci ne s’applique qu’aux produits distribués par Yamaha Canada

Musique Ltée.

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instruc-

tions contained in this manual, meets FCC require-

ments. Modiﬁcations not expressly approved by

Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to

use the product.

2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to acces-

sories and/or another product use only high quality

shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product

MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Fail-

ure to follow instructions could void your FCC authori-

zation to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to com-

ply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations,

Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with

these requirements provides a reasonable level of

assurance that your use of this product in a residential

environment will not result in harmful interference with

other electronic devices. This equipment generates/

uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used

according to the instructions found in the users manual,

may cause interference harmful to the operation of

other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regula-

tions does not guarantee that interference will not occur

in all installations. If this product is found to be the

source of interference, which can be determined by

turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate

the problem by using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being

affected by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line ﬁlter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient

the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon

lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfac-

tory results, please contact the local retailer authorized

to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate

the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corpo-

ration of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600

Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620

The above statements apply ONLY to those products

distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its

subsidiaries.

IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM

Connecting the Plug and Cord

IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in

accordance with the following code:

BLUE : NEUTRAL

BROWN : LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appa-

ratus may not correspond with the coloured makings iden-

tifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to

the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured

BLACK.

The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to

the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured

RED.

Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth ter-

minal of the three pin plug.

CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH

WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.

ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLEC-

TRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE

LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA

PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU’AU FOND.

Introduction

92-469

(bottom)

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS:

Yamaha electronic

products may have either labels similar to the graphics

shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these

graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these

graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions

indicated on this page and those indicated in the safety

instruction section.

See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings.

The exclamation point within the

equilateral triangle is intended to alert

the user to the presence of important

operating and maintenance (servic-

ing) instructions in the literature

accompanying the product.

The lightning ﬂash with arrowhead

symbol, within the equilateral trian-

gle, is intended to alert the user to the

presence of uninsulated “dangerous

voltage” within the product’s enclo-

sure that may be of sufﬁcient magni-

tude to constitute a risk of electrical

shock.

IMPORTANT NOTICE:

All Yamaha electronic products

are tested and approved by an independent safety testing

laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is

properly installed and used in its normal and customary

manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO

NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so

unless speciﬁcally authorized by Yamaha. Product perfor-

mance and/or safety standards may be diminished.

Claims ﬁled under the expressed warranty may be denied

if the unit is/has been modiﬁed. Implied warranties may

also be affected.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:

The

information contained in this manual is believed to be

correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves

the right to change or modify any of the speciﬁcations

without notice or obligation to update existing units.

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:

Yamaha strives to pro-

duce products that are both user safe and environmentally

friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the

production methods used to produce them, meet these

goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the

law, we want you to be aware of the following:

Battery Notice:

This product MAY contain a small non-

rechargable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in

place. The average life span of this type of battery is

approximately ﬁve years. When replacement becomes

necessary, contact a qualiﬁed service representative to

perform the replacement.

Warning:

Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or

incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away

from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as

regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the

servicer is required by law to return the defective parts.

However, you do have the option of having the servicer

dispose of these parts for you.

Disposal Notice:

Should this product become damaged

beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is consid-

ered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and

federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products

that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc.

NOTICE:

Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl-

edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the

unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the man-

ufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners respon-

sibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult

your dealer before requesting service.

NAME PLATE LOCATION:

The graphic below indi-

cates the location of the name plate. The model number,

serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on

this plate. You should record the model number, serial

number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided

below and retain this manual as a permanent record of

your purchase.

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK.

DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).

NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.

REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

CLP-130

Model

Serial No.

Purchase Date

CLP-120

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha or the

authorized distributor listed below.

Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou

au distributeur le plus proche de vous ﬁgurant dans la liste suivante.

Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten

Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen

Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.

Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana

o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.

CANADA

Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,

M1S 3R1, Canada

Tel: 416-298-1311

U.S.A.

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,

U.S.A.

Tel: 714-522-9011

MEXICO

Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V.,

Departamento de ventas

Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del

Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F.

Tel: 686-00-33

BRAZIL

Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA.

Av. Rebouças 2636, São Paulo, Brasil

Tel: 011-853-1377

ARGENTINA

Yamaha de Panamá S.A. Sucursal de Argentina

Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053,

Buenos Aires, Argentina

Tel: 1-4371-7021

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN

AMERICAN COUNTRIES/

CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha de Panamá S.A.

Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,

Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,

Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá

Tel: +507-269-5311

THE UNITED KINGDOM

Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.

Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,

MK7 8BL, England

Tel: 01908-366700

IRELAND

Danfay Ltd.

61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin

Tel: 01-2859177

GERMANY

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Switzerland

Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland

Tel: 01-383 3990

AUSTRIA

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-60203900

THE NETHERLANDS

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Nederland

Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands

Tel: 0347-358 040

BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Belgium

Rue de Geneve (Genevastraat) 10, 1140 - Brussels,

Belgium

Tel: 02-726 6032

FRANCE

Yamaha Musique France, S.A.

Division Professionnelle

BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France

Tel: 01-64-61-4000

ITALY

Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.

Combo Division

Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy

Tel: 02-935-771

SPAIN/PORTUGAL

Yamaha-Hazen Música, S.A.

Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230

Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain

Tel: 91-201-0700

GREECE

Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House

147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece

Tel: 01-228 2160

SWEDEN

Yamaha Scandinavia AB

J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1

Box 30053

S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden

Tel: 031 89 34 00

DENMARK

YS Copenhagen Liaison Ofﬁce

Generatorvej 8B

DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark

Tel: 44 92 49 00

FINLAND

F-Musiikki Oy

Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,

SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland

Tel: 09 618511

NORWAY

Norsk ﬁlial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB

Grini Næringspark 1

N-1345 Østerås, Norway

Tel: 67 16 77 70

ICELAND

Skifan HF

Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120

IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland

Tel: 525 5000

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: +49-4101-3030

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2312

TURKEY/CYPRUS

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Gulf FZE

LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone

P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E.

Tel: +971-4-881-5868

HONG KONG

Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.

11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,

Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong

Tel: 2737-7688

INDONESIA

PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)

PT. Nusantik

Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot

Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia

Tel: 21-520-2577

KOREA

Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.

Tong-Yang Securities Bldg. 16F 23-8 Yoido-dong,

Youngdungpo-ku, Seoul, Korea

Tel: 02-3770-0661

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.

Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,

Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia

Tel: 3-703-0900

PHILIPPINES

Yupangco Music Corporation

339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,

Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines

Tel: 819-7551

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.

11 Ubi Road #06-00, Meiban Industrial Building,

Singapore

Tel: 65-747-4374

TAIWAN

Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.

3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.

Taiwan 104, R.O.C.

Tel: 02-2511-8688

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.

121/60-61 RS Tower 17th Floor,

Ratchadaphisek RD., Dindaeng,

Bangkok 10320, Thailand

Tel: 02-641-2951

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2317

AUSTRALIA

Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.

Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,

Victoria 3006, Australia

Tel: 3-9693-5111

NEW ZEALAND

Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd.

146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa,

Auckland, New Zealand

Tel: 9-634-0099

COUNTRIES AND TRUST

TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2312

NORTH AMERICA

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

EUROPE

AFRICA

MIDDLE EAST

ASIA

OCEANIA

HEAD OFFICE

Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-3273

[CL] 26

Owner's Manual

Bedienungsanleitung

Mode d'emploi

Manual de instrucciones

Before using the Clavinova, be sure to read “PRECAUTIONS„ on pages 6 -7.

Achten Sie darauf, vor Einsatz des Clavinova die “VORSICHTSMASSNAHMEN„ auf Seite 6-7

durchzulesen.

Avant d'utiliser le Clavinova, lire attentivement la section «PRECAUTIONS D'USAGE» aux

pages 6- 7.

Antes de utilizar el Clavinova, lea las “PRECAUCIONES„ que debe tener en cuenta en las páginas

6- 7.

IMPORTANT

Check your power supply

Make sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage specified on the name plate

on the bottom panel. In some areas a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of

the main keyboard unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the

voltage in your area. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. To

change the setting use a "minus" screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage

appears next to the pointer on the panel.

WICHTIG

Überprüfung der Stromversorgung

Vergewissern Sie sich vor dem Anschließen an das Stromnetz, daß die örtliche Netzspannung den

Betriebsspannungswerten auf dem Typenschild an der Unterseite des Instruments entspricht. In

bestimmten Verkaufsgebieten ist das Instrument mit einem Spannungswähler an der Unterseite

neben der Netzkabeldurchführung ausgestattet. Falls vorhanden, muß der Spannungswähler auf

die örtliche Netzspannung eingestellt werden. Der Spannungswähler wurde werkseitig auf 240 V

voreingestellt. Zum Verstellen drehen Sie den Spannungsregler mit einem Schlitzschraubendreher,

bis der Zeiger auf den korrekten Spannungswert weist.

IMPORTANT

Contrôler la source d'alimentation

Vérifiez que la tension spécifiée sur le panneau inférieur correspond à la tension du secteur. Dans

certaines régions, l'instrument peut être équipé d'un sélecteur de tension situé sur le panneau

inférieur du clavier à proximité du cordon d'alimentation.

Vérifiez que ce sélecteur est bien réglé en fonction de la tension secteur de votre région. Le

sélecteur de tension est réglé sur 240 V au départ d'usine. Pour modifier ce réglage, utilisez un

tournevis à lame plate pour tourner le sélecteur afin de mettre l'indication correspondant à la

tension de votre région vis à vis du repère triangulaire situé sur le panneau.

IMPORTANTE

Verifique la alimentación de corriente

Asegúrese de que tensión de alimentación de CA de su área corresponde con la tensión

especificada en la placa de características del panel inferior. En algunas zonas puede haberse

incorporado un selector de tensión en el panel inferior de la unidad del teclado principal, cerca del

cable de alimentación. Asegúrese de que el selector de tensión esté ajustado a la tensión de su

área. El selector de tensión se ajusta a 240V cuando la unidad sale de fábrica. Para cambiar el

ajuste, emplee un destornillador de cabeza "recta" para girar el selector de modo que aparezca la

tensión correcta al lado del indicador del panel.

Clavinova Web site (English only)

http://www.yamahaclavinova.com/

Yamaha Manual Library

http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/

M.D.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation

2002 Yamaha Corporation

V856070AP???.?-0?B0 Printed in Indonesia

DIC 338

Transcripción de documentos

Owner's Manual Bedienungsanleitung Mode d'emploi Manual de instrucciones Before using the Clavinova, be sure to read “PRECAUTIONS„ on pages 6 -7. Achten Sie darauf, vor Einsatz des Clavinova die “VORSICHTSMASSNAHMEN„ auf Seite 6-7 durchzulesen. Avant d'utiliser le Clavinova, lire attentivement la section «PRECAUTIONS D'USAGE» aux pages 6-7. Antes de utilizar el Clavinova, lea las “PRECAUCIONES„ que debe tener en cuenta en las páginas 6-7. IMPORTANT Check your power supply Make sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage specified on the name plate on the bottom panel. In some areas a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of the main keyboard unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. To change the setting use a "minus" screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage appears next to the pointer on the panel. WICHTIG Überprüfung der Stromversorgung Vergewissern Sie sich vor dem Anschließen an das Stromnetz, daß die örtliche Netzspannung den Betriebsspannungswerten auf dem Typenschild an der Unterseite des Instruments entspricht. In bestimmten Verkaufsgebieten ist das Instrument mit einem Spannungswähler an der Unterseite neben der Netzkabeldurchführung ausgestattet. Falls vorhanden, muß der Spannungswähler auf die örtliche Netzspannung eingestellt werden. Der Spannungswähler wurde werkseitig auf 240 V voreingestellt. Zum Verstellen drehen Sie den Spannungsregler mit einem Schlitzschraubendreher, bis der Zeiger auf den korrekten Spannungswert weist. IMPORTANT Yamaha Manual Library Contrôler la source d'alimentation Vérifiez que la tension spécifiée sur le panneau inférieur correspond à la tension du secteur. Dans certaines régions, l'instrument peut être équipé d'un sélecteur de tension situé sur le panneau inférieur du clavier à proximité du cordon d'alimentation. Vérifiez que ce sélecteur est bien réglé en fonction de la tension secteur de votre région. Le sélecteur de tension est réglé sur 240 V au départ d'usine. Pour modifier ce réglage, utilisez un tournevis à lame plate pour tourner le sélecteur afin de mettre l'indication correspondant à la tension de votre région vis à vis du repère triangulaire situé sur le panneau. http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/ IMPORTANTE Clavinova Web site (English only) http://www.yamahaclavinova.com/ M.D.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation C 2002 Yamaha Corporation V856070AP???.?-0?B0 Printed in Indonesia Verifique la alimentación de corriente Asegúrese de que tensión de alimentación de CA de su área corresponde con la tensión especificada en la placa de características del panel inferior. En algunas zonas puede haberse incorporado un selector de tensión en el panel inferior de la unidad del teclado principal, cerca del cable de alimentación. Asegúrese de que el selector de tensión esté ajustado a la tensión de su área. El selector de tensión se ajusta a 240V cuando la unidad sale de fábrica. Para cambiar el ajuste, emplee un destornillador de cabeza "recta" para girar el selector de modo que aparezca la tensión correcta al lado del indicador del panel. DIC 338 Introduction SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic products may have either labels similar to the graphics shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions indicated on this page and those indicated in the safety instruction section. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK. DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings. The exclamation point within the equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within the equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electrical shock. Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non- rechargable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the servicer is required by law to return the defective parts. However, you do have the option of having the servicer dispose of these parts for you. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl- edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indicates the location of the name plate. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic products are tested and approved by an independent safety testing laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is properly installed and used in its normal and customary manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so unless specifically authorized by Yamaha. Product performance and/or safety standards may be diminished. Claims filed under the expressed warranty may be denied if the unit is/has been modified. Implied warranties may also be affected. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: 92-469 1 (bottom) CLP-130 Model Serial No. Purchase Date CLP-120 Thank you for purchasing the Yamaha Clavinova! We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced and convenient functions of the Clavinova. We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference. About this Owner’s Manual This manual consists of three main sections: “Introduction,” “Reference” and “Appendix.” Reference (page 13): This section explains how to make detailed settings for the Clavinova’s various functions. Appendix (page 69): This section introduces reference material. ENGLISH Introduction (page 2): Please read this section first. * The models CLP-130/120 will be referred to as the CLP/Clavinova in this Owner’s Manual. * The illustrations and LED displays shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. COPYRIGHT NOTICE This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, MIDI files, WAVE data. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES. Trademarks: • • • Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders. “The Clavinova-Computer Connection,” is a supplementary guidebook that describes, for beginners, what you can do with your Clavinova and a personal computer and how to set up a Clavinova-Computer system (the manual is not written for any specific models). The document is available as a PDF file (in English) at the following Internet address: Clavinova Web site (English only): http://www.yamahaclavinova.com/ Yamaha Manual Library: http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/ CLP-130/120 About this Owner’s Manual 3 Table of Contents Introduction SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION ...................... 2 About this Owner’s Manual ........................ 3 Application Index........................................ 5 PRECAUTIONS............................................. 6 ENGLISH Accessories .................................................. 8 Maintenance ............................................... 8 Features....................................................... 9 Before Using the Clavinova ...................... 10 Key Cover ...........................................................10 Music Rest ..........................................................10 Turning the Power On.......................................11 Setting the Volume.............................................11 Using Headphones .............................................12 Using the Speaker Switch...................................12 Reference Part Names................................................ 14 Listening to the Demonstration Tunes .... 16 Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs .......... 17 Practicing a One-Hand Part Using 50 Preset Songs (Part Cancel Function) .......................18 A-B Repeat for 50 Preset Songs .........................20 Selecting & Playing Voices........................ 21 Selecting Voices ..................................................21 Using the Pedals .................................................21 Adding Variations to the Sound – [VARIATION] (CLP-130)/[BRILLIANCE]/ [REVERB]/[EFFECT]....................................22 Touch Sensitivity – [TOUCH] ..........................24 Transposition – [TRANSPOSE]........................25 Combining Two Voices (Dual mode)...............26 Splitting the Keyboard Range and Playing Two Different Voices (Split mode) (CLP-130) ....27 Using the Metronome........................................29 Recording Your Performance ................... 30 Recording to [TRACK1]....................................30 Re-recording TRACK1 ......................................32 Recording to [TRACK2]....................................32 Changing the Initial Settings (Data recorded at the beginning of a song) ................................34 Playing Back Recorded Songs................... 35 Playing Back a Song ...........................................35 Useful Playback Functions.................................36 4 CLP-130/120 Table of Contents Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION]............... 37 Basic Procedure in Function Mode .................. 38 About Each Function......................................... 40 F1. Fine Tuning of the Pitch ....................... 40 F2. Selecting a Scale..................................... 41 F3. Dual Mode Functions ........................... 42 F4. (CLP-130) Split Mode Functions ......... 43 F5. (CLP-130) / F4. (CLP-120) Other Functions.................................... 44 F.6 (CLP-130) / F.5 (CLP-120) Metronome Volume ............................. 45 F7. (CLP-130) / F6. (CLP-120) Preset Song Part Cancel Volume ......... 45 F8. (CLP-130) / F7. (CLP-120) MIDI Functions .................................... 45 F9. (CLP-130) / F8. (CLP-120) Backup Functions ................................. 48 About MIDI................................................ 49 Connections .............................................. 50 Connectors......................................................... 50 Connecting a Personal Computer .................... 52 Troubleshooting........................................ 56 Options ...................................................... 56 CLP-120: Keyboard Stand Assembly ......... 57 CLP-130: Keyboard Stand Assembly ......... 60 Preset Voice List ........................................ 63 Demo Song List ......................................... 66 Index.......................................................... 67 Appendix Factory Setting List ................................... 70 MIDI Data Format ..................................... 71 MIDI Implementation Chart ..................... 75 Specifications ............................................ 76 Application Index Use this index to find reference pages that may be helpful for your particular application and situation. Listening Listening to demo songs with different voices....................................... “Listening to the Demonstration Tunes” on page 16 Listening to songs from “50 Greats for the Piano” ...................................... “Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs” on page 17 Listening to my recorded performance .................................................................“Playing Back Recorded Songs” on page 35 Using the three performance control pedals.............................................................................. “Using the Pedals” on page 21 Playing an accompaniment that matches pitch ................................................“Transposition – [TRANSPOSE]” on page 25 Selecting a touch sensitivity type......................................................................... “Touch Sensitivity – [TOUCH]” on page 24 Fine tuning the pitch of the entire instrument when you play the Clavinova along with other instruments or CD music. ............................................................................ “Fine tuning of the pitch” on page 40 ENGLISH Playing Changing voices Viewing the list of voices..............................................................................................................“Preset Voice List” on page 63 Simulating a concert hall ..................................................................................................................... “[REVERB]” on page 22 Combining two voices............................................................................... “Combining Two Voices (Dual mode)” on page 26 Playing different sounds with left and right hands ................................ “Splitting the Keyboard Range and Playing Two Different Voices (Split mode) (CLP-130)” on page 27 Making the sound more brilliant or mellower ........................................................................... “[BRILLIANCE]” on page 22 Adding spread or swell to the sound .................................................................................................... “[EFFECT]” on page 23 Enhancing the sound with effects............................................................................... “[VARIATION] (CLP-130)” on page 22 Practicing Muting the right- or left-hand part ...................................................... “Practicing a One-Hand Part Using 50 Preset Songs (Part Cancel Function)” on page 18 Practicing a specified phrase repeatedly..............................................................“A-B Repeat for 50 Preset Songs” on page 20 Practicing with an accurate and steady tempo .................................................................“Using the Metronome” on page 29 Practicing using your recorded song ..................................................................... “Recording Your Performance” on page 30 Recording Recording your performance................................................................................. “Recording Your Performance” on page 30 Settings Adjusting the Clavinova settings ................................................................... “Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION]” on page 37 Connecting the Clavinova to other devices What is MIDI? ....................................................................................................................................“About MIDI” on page 49 Recording your performance....................................................................................................... “AUX OUT jacks” on page 50 Raising the volume ....................................................................................................................... “AUX OUT jacks” on page 50 Outputting other instruments’ sound from the Clavinova............................................................ “AUX IN jacks” on page 51 Connecting a computer ..................................................................................“Connecting a Personal Computer” on page 52 Assembling Assembling and disassembling the Clavinova ................. “CLP-130/120”: Keyboard Stand Assembly” on pages page 57–62 CLP-130/120 Application Index 5 PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. WARNING ENGLISH Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/Power cord ● ● ● ● Water warning Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. Use only the supplied power cord/plug. Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. ● ● Fire warning ● Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. If you notice any abnormality Do not open ● Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. ● If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/Power cord ● ● ● Location When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. ● ● ● ● ● Assembly ● Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly process. Failure to assemble the instrument in the proper sequence might result in damage to the instrument or even injury. (1)B-7 6 CLP-130/120 PRECAUTIONS 1/2 Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables. Do not place the instrument against a wall (allow at least 3 cm/ one-inch from the wall), since this can cause inadequate air circulation, and possibly result in the instrument overheating. Connections Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. ● ● ● Maintenance ● ● When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry or slightly damp cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. Do not place the bench in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or step-ladder or for any other purpose might result in accident or injury. Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the possibility of accident or injury. If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten them periodically using the included tool. Saving data Saving and backing up your data Handling caution ● ● ● ● ● ● Take care that the key cover does not pinch your fingers, and do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the key cover or instrument. Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the key cover, panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. Depending upon the Backup Settings (page 48), internal data is retained for about 1 week after the power is turned off. If the period is exceeded, the data will be lost. Be sure to turn the power switch on for a few minutes at least once a week. The data could be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save important data to external media such as the Yamaha MDF3 MIDI data filer. ENGLISH ● Using the bench (If included) Backing up the external media ● To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you save your important data onto two external media. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. (1)B-7 2/2 CLP-130/120 PRECAUTIONS 7 Accessories • “50 Greats for the Piano” (Music Book) • Owner’s Manual This manual contains complete instructions for operating your Clavinova. • Bench ENGLISH A bench may be included or optional, depending on your locale. Maintenance Clean the instrument using a dry or slightly damp soft cloth (wring well). CAUTION Do not use benzene, thinner, detergent, or chemically-treated cloth for cleaning. Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber products on the instrument. Otherwise, the panel or keys may become discolored or degraded. CAUTION Before using the Clavinova, be sure to read “Precautions” on pages 6 – 7. Tuning Unlike an acoustic piano, the Clavinova does not need to be tuned. It always stays perfectly in tune. Transporting If you move to another location, you can transport the Clavinova along with your other belongings. You can move the unit as it is (assembled) or you can disassemble the unit. Transport the keyboard horizontally. Do not lean it up against a wall or stand it up on its side. Do not subject the instrument to excessive vibration or shock. 8 CLP-130/120 Accessories / Maintenance CLP130(E).book Page 9 Thursday, October 31, 2002 2:45 PM Features TEMPO [▼] [▲] [REVERB] / [EFFECT] [TRANSPOSE] You can change the song tempo (speed) and select useful functions using this buttons (pages 37–48). Add reverb (reverberation) and effects to the sound (pages 22, 23). You can shift the pitch of the entire keyboard up or down so that the pitch will match that of another instrument or singer, while you play the same, unshifted keys (page 25). The Clavinova includes 50 preset songs. This section enables you to listen to these songs, practice using a convenient practice function, and record and play back your performance (pages 17–20, 30–36). [METRONOME] Control the metronome functions (page 29). [DEMO] Voice buttons [TOUCH] Demonstration playback is available for each voice (page 16). Select voices from 14 internal sounds including Grand Piano 1 and 2 (page 21). You can also combine two voices at the same time (page 26). Fine-tune the touch response (page 24). MIN MAX START/STOP BRIGHT BRILLIANCE GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE VARIATION CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR GUITAR WOOD BASS E.BASS SPLIT TEMPO/ OTHER VALUE MASTER VOLUME MELLOW DEMO METRONOME TEMPO FUNCTION – /NO +/ YES PRESET USER 1 USER 2 USER 3 TRACK 1 TRACK 2 START/STOP REC SONG TEMPO / FUNCTION VOICE ROOM HALL 1 HALL 2 STAGE REVERB CHORUS PHASER TREMOLO DELAY EFFECT HARD MEDIUM SOFT TOUCH ENGLISH The Yamaha Clavinova CLP-130/120 digital piano offers unmatched sonic realism and natural grand-piano type playability as well as Yamaha’s original “AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling (CLP-130)/AWM Stereo Sampling (CLP-120)” tonegeneration technology for rich, musical voices, and a special “Graded Hammer” keyboard that provides graded key weight and response throughout the keyboard range. The CLP-130/120 Grand Piano 1 and 2 voices feature totally new samples painstakingly recorded from a full concert grand piano. The CLP-130 Grand Piano 1 voice features three velocity-switched samples (Dynamic Sampling), special “Sustain Sampling” (page 88) that samples the unique resonance of an acoustic grand piano’s soundboard and strings when the damper pedal is pressed, and “Keyoff Samples” that add the subtle sound produced when the keys are released. The CLP-130/120 comes much closer to the sound of a true acoustic piano. ON TRANSPOSE [BRILLIANCE] [SPLIT] Adjust the brightness of the tone using this slider (page 22). You can play different voices on the left- and right-hand sections of the keyboard (CLP-130) (page 27). [MASTER VOLUME] Adjust the volume level using this slider (page 11). (CLP-130) MIN MAX START/STOP BRIGHT BRILLIANCE GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE VARIATION GUITAR WOOD BASS E.BASS SPLIT TEMPO/ OTHER VALUE MASTER VOLUME MELLOW DEMO METRONOME TEMPO FUNCTION TEMPO / FUNCTION – / NO +/ YES PRESET USER 1 USER 2 USER 3 TRACK 1 TRACK 2 START/STOP REC SONG VOICE ROOM HALL 1 HALL 2 STAGE REVERB CHORUS PHASER TREMOLO DELAY EFFECT HARD MEDIUM SOFT TOUCH ON TRANSPOSE POWER OFF ON NORMAL HP. SW SPEAKER Connect the pedal cord here to use the Clavinova’s pedals (page 51). PEDAL PHONES This switch turns the internal speakers on or off (page 12). Connect recording equipment (such as a cassette tape recorder) here to record your performance (page 50). R L LEVEL FIXED R L/L+R AUX OUT Delivers the output of the Clavinova for connection to an instrument amplifier, mixing console, PA system, or recording equipment (page 51). L/L+R AUX IN MIDI Mac PC-1 TO HOST MIDI PC-2 HOST SELECT THRU A set of standard stereo headphones can be plugged in here for private practice (page 12). R OUT This jack and selector switch allow direct connection to a personal computer for sequencing and other music applications (pages 52–55). IN Connect a MIDI device here to use various MIDI functions (pages 45–47). (About MIDI ➝ page 49) CLP-130/120 Features 9 Before Using the Clavinova Key Cover To open the key cover: Lift the cover slightly, then push and slide it open. To close the key cover: ENGLISH Slide the cover toward you and gently lower the cover over the keys. CAUTION Be careful to avoid catching your fingers when opening or closing the cover. CAUTION Hold the cover with both hands when opening or closing it. Do not release it until it is fully opened or closed. Be careful to avoid catching fingers (yours or others, especially children’s) between the cover and main unit. CAUTION Do not place objects such as a piece of metal or paper on top of the key cover. Small objects placed on the key cover may fall inside the unit when the cover is opened and may be nearly impossible to remove. This could cause electric shock, short circuit, fire or other serious damage to the instrument. Music Rest To raise the music rest: 1. Pull the music rest up and toward yourself as far as it will go. 2. Flip down the two metal supports at the left and right on the rear of the music rest. 3. Lower the music rest so that it rests on the metal supports. To lower the music rest: 1. Pull the music rest toward yourself as far as it will go. 2. Raise the two metal supports (at the rear of the music rest). 3. Gently lower the music rest backward until it is all the way down. CAUTION Do not try to use the music rest in a half-raised position. When lowering the music rest, do not release your hands from the music rest until it is all the way down. 10 CLP-130/120 Before Using the Clavinova Turning the Power On 1. Connect the power cord. Insert the plugs at the ends of the cord, one into the AC INLET on the Clavinova, and the other into a standard AC outlet. In some areas, a plug adaptor may be provided to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area. 1 2 (The shape of plug differs depending on locale.) 2. Turn the power on. Press the [POWER] button. • The display located in the center of the front panel and the power indicator located below the left end of the keyboard lights up. ENGLISH (bottom surface) [POWER] Power indicator Display Normally indicates tempo. When you’re ready to turn off the power, press the [POWER] button again. • The display and the power indicator turn off. TIP Power indicator If you close the key cover without turning the power off, the power indicator remains lit, indicating that the power is still on. Setting the Volume Initially set the [MASTER VOLUME] control about halfway between the “MIN” and “MAX” settings. Then, when you start playing, re-adjust the [MASTER VOLUME] control to the most comfortable listening level. MIN MAX MASTER VOLUME The level decreases. The level increases. CAUTION Do not use the Clavinova at a high volume level for a long period of time, or your hearing may be damaged. TERMINOLOGY TIP MASTER VOLUME: The volume level of the entire keyboard sound You can also adjust the [PHONES] output level and the AUX IN input level using the [MASTER VOLUME] slider. CLP-130/120 Before Using the Clavinova 11 Using Headphones Connect a pair of headphones to one of the [PHONES] jacks. Two [PHONES] jacks are provided. You can connect two sets of standard stereo headphones. (If you are using only one pair of headphones, you can plug them into either jack.) bottom surface ENGLISH OFF ON NORMAL HP. SW SPEAKER PHONES standard stereo phone plug Using the Headphone Hanger A headphone hanger is included in the CLP-130/120 package so that you can hang the headphones on the Clavinova. Install the headphone hanger using included two screws (4 × 10mm) as shown in the figure. CAUTION Do not hang anything other than the headphones on the hanger. Otherwise, the Clavinova or the hanger may be damaged. Using the Speaker Switch This switch turns the internal speakers on or off. NORMAL (HP. SW) ......... The speakers produce sound as long as a pair of headphones is not connected. ON ....................................... The speakers always produce sound. OFF ...................................... The speakers produce no sound. 12 CLP-130/120 Before Using the Clavinova OFF ON NORMAL HP. SW SPEAKER PHONES Part Names................................................................ 14 Listening to the Demonstration Tunes ................... 16 Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs.......................... 17 Practicing a One-Hand Part Using 50 Preset Songs (Part Cancel Function)............................................ 18 A-B Repeat for 50 Preset Songs .................................. 20 Selecting & Playing Voices ....................................... 21 Selecting Voices ........................................................... 21 Using the Pedals .......................................................... 21 Adding Variations to the Sound – [VARIATION] (CLP-130)/[BRILLIANCE]/[REVERB]/ [EFFECT]................................................................. 22 Touch Sensitivity – [TOUCH].................................... 24 Transposition – [TRANSPOSE] ................................. 25 Combining Two Voices (Dual mode)......................... 26 Splitting the Keyboard Range and Playing Two Different Voices (Split mode) (CLP-130)............... 27 Using the Metronome ................................................. 29 Recording Your Performance................................... 30 This section explains how to make detailed settings for the Clavinova’s various functions. ENGLISH Reference F5. (CLP-130) / F4. (CLP-120) Other Functions..... 44 F.6 (CLP-130) / F.5 (CLP-120) Metronome Volume .. 45 F7. (CLP-130) / F6. (CLP-120) Preset Song Part Cancel Volume .............................................. 45 F8. (CLP-130) / F7. (CLP-120) MIDI Functions ..... 45 F9. (CLP-130) / F8. (CLP-120) Backup Functions.. 48 About MIDI.............................................................. 49 Connections ............................................................. 50 Connectors .................................................................. 50 Connecting a Personal Computer .............................. 52 Troubleshooting ....................................................... 56 Options..................................................................... 56 CLP-120: Keyboard Stand Assembly....................... 57 CLP-130: Keyboard Stand Assembly....................... 60 Preset Voice List........................................................ 63 Demo Song List........................................................ 66 Index ......................................................................... 67 Recording to [TRACK1] ............................................. 30 Re-recording TRACK1................................................ 32 Recording to [TRACK2] ............................................. 32 Changing the Initial Settings (Data recorded at the beginning of a song)................................................ 34 Playing Back Recorded Songs .................................. 35 Playing Back a Song .................................................... 35 Useful Playback Functions.......................................... 36 Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION]........................... 37 Basic Procedure in Function Mode ............................ 38 About Each Function .................................................. 40 F1. Fine Tuning of the Pitch ....................................... 40 F2. Selecting a Scale..................................................... 41 F3. Dual Mode Functions ........................................... 42 F4. (CLP-130) Split Mode Functions........................ 43 CLP-130/120 13 Part Names Top panel (CLP-130) 2 4 MIN 5 8 TEMPO/ OTHER VALUE TEMPO FUNCTION MASTER VOLUME MELLOW 3 7 6 MAX START/STOP BRIGHT DEMO BRILLIANCE METRONOME — /NO +/ YES USER 1 USER 2 USER 3 PRESET TEMPO / FUNCTION TRACK 1 TRACK 2 START/STOP REC SONG ENGLISH 9 GRAND PIANO 2 GRAND PIANO 1 E.PIANO 1 JAZZ ORGAN CHURCH ORGAN STRINGS E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD CHOIR E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE WOOD BASS GUITAR A E.BASS MIN MAX START/STOP BRIGHT BRILLIANCE GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE VARIATION GUITAR WOOD BASS E.BASS SPLIT TEMPO/ OTHER VALUE MASTER VOLUME DEMO METRONOME TEMPO FUNCTION TEMPO / FUNCTION — / NO +/ YES PRESET USER 1 USER 2 USER 3 TRACK 1 SONG TRACK 2 START/ STOP REC VOICE ROOM HALL 1 HALL 2 STAGE REVERB CHORUS PHASER TREMOLO DELAY EFFECT HARD MEDIUM SOFT TOUCH ROOM HALL 1 HALL 2 STAGE SPLIT VOICE MELLOW B C CHORUS PHASER TREMOLO DELAY HARD MEDIUM SOFT D VARIATION REVERB 0 EFFECT ON TOUCH TRANSPOSE ON TRANSPOSE POWER M 1 N O A-1 B-1 C0 D0 E0 F0 G0 A0 B0 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 B1 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 B2 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 A3 B3 C4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 B4 C5 D5 E5 F5 G5 A5 B5 C6 D6 E6 F6 G6 A6 B6 C7 PEDAL E Connectors (CLP-130) R L LEVEL FIXED OFF ON NORMAL HP. SW SPEAKER K R L/L+R R L/L+R AUX OUT AUX IN F G MIDI PHONES L Mac PC-1 MIDI PC-2 TO HOST HOST SELECT H I THRU 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 14 [POWER] ....................................... P11 [MASTER VOLUME] ....................... P11 [BRILLIANCE] ................................ P22 [DEMO] ........................................ P16 METRONOME [START/STOP] ........ P29 [TEMPO/FUNCTION #▲▼] ..... P29, 38 LED display ................................... P15 [–/NO] / [+/YES] [PRESET] [USER1] [USER2] [USER3] (CLP-130) [TRACK1] [TRACK2] SONG [START/STOP] [REC].......................... P17–20, P30–36 CLP-130/120 Part Names 9 0 A B C D E F G OUT IN J Voice buttons................................ P21 [SPLIT] (CLP-130).......................... P27 [REVERB] ....................................... P22 [EFFECT] ....................................... P23 [TOUCH]....................................... P24 [TRANSPOSE]................................ P25 [PEDAL]......................................... P51 AUX OUT ...................................... P50 AUX IN ......................................... P51 Top panel (CLP-120) 4 2 MIN 5 8 TEMPO/ OTHER VALUE TEMPO FUNCTION MASTER VOLUME MELLOW 3 7 6 MAX START/STOP BRIGHT DEMO BRILLIANCE METRONOME — /NO +/ YES TRACK 1 PRESET TEMPO / FUNCTION TRACK 2 START/STOP REC SONG 9 CHURCH ORGAN1 E.PIANO 1 JAZZ ORGAN CHURCH ORGAN2 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD1 STRINGS 1 STRINGS 2 HARPSICHORD2 A VIBRAPHONE CHOIR GUITAR REVERB VOICE MIN MAX START/STOP BRIGHT BRILLIANCE GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD 1 HARPSICHORD 2 VIBRAPHONE CHURCH ORGAN 1 CHURCH ORGAN 2 JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS 1 STRINGS 2 CHOIR GUITAR ROOM HALL 1 HALL 2 STAGE TEMPO/ OTHER VALUE MASTER VOLUME MELLOW DEMO METRONOME TEMPO FUNCTION — / NO +/ YES PRESET TRACK 1 TRACK 2 START/STOP SONG TEMPO / FUNCTION REC CHORUS PHASER TREMOLO DELAY REVERB VOICE EFFECT HARD MEDIUM SOFT TOUCH B C CHORUS PHASER TREMOLO DELAY HARD MEDIUM SOFT ROOM HALL 1 HALL 2 STAGE EFFECT D ENGLISH GRAND PIANO 2 GRAND PIANO 1 ON TOUCH TRANSPOSE ON TRANSPOSE POWER M 1 N A-1 B-1 C0 D0 E0 F0 G0 A0 B0 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 B1 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 B2 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 A3 B3 C4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 B4 C5 D5 E5 F5 G5 A5 B5 C6 D6 E6 F6 G6 A6 B6 C7 O Connectors (CLP-120) OFF ON NORMAL HP. SW SPEAKER K MIDI LEVEL FIXED THRU Mac PC-1 PHONES H I J K L R L R L/L+R R OUT IN MIDI PC-2 L/L+R AUX OUT AUX IN F G [TO HOST] ...............................P49–55 HOST SELECT...........................P49–55 MIDI [IN] [OUT] [THRU]...........P49–55 [SPEAKER] ..................................... P12 L M N O TO HOST HOST SELECT H I PEDAL J E [PHONES] ..................................... P12 Soft (Left) Pedal ............................ P22 Sostenute (Center) Pedal............... P22 Damper (Right) Pedal ................... P21 Display • Check the operation on the display in the center of the top panel as you proceed. • The display indicates different values, as shown below, depending on the operation. Tempo (Normal indication) A song number of “50 Greats for the Piano” Function number Parameter value CLP-130/120 Part Names 15 Listening to the Demonstration Tunes Demonstration tunes are provided that effectively demonstrate each of the CLP-130/120’s voices. 2 5 MIN 4 MAX START/STOP BRIGHT BRILLIANCE GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE VARIATION GUITAR WOOD BASS E.BASS SPLIT TEMPO/ OTHER VALUE MASTER VOLUME MELLOW 3 DEMO METRONOME TEMPO FUNCTION — /NO +/ YES PRESET TEMPO / FUNCTION USER 1 USER 2 USER 3 TRACK 1 TRACK 2 START/STOP REC STRINGS CHOIR SONG VOICE ROOM HALL 1 HALL 2 STAGE REVERB CHORUS PHASER TREMOLO DELAY EFFECT HARD MEDIUM SOFT ON TOUCH TRANSPOSE ENGLISH Procedure 1. Turn the power on. (In case the power is not turned ON) Press the [POWER] button. When the power is turned ON, one of the voice button LEDs will light. Initially set the [MASTER VOLUME] control about half way between the “MIN” and “MAX” settings. Then, when you start playing, re-adjust the [MASTER VOLUME] control to the most comfortable listening level. 2. Engage Demo mode. Press the [DEMO] button to engage Demo mode. The voice button indicators will flash in sequence. 3. Play a Voice demo. Press one of the voice buttons to start playback of all songs starting from the corresponding voice demo tune — featuring the voice normally selected by that voice button. (If you press the SONG [START/STOP] button instead of a voice button, the GRAND PIANO 1 demo tune will begin playback.) Adjust the volume/brilliance Use the [MASTER VOLUME] control to adjust the volume and the [BRILLIANCE] control to adjust the brilliance (page 22). 4. Stop the Voice demo. Press the SONG [START/STOP] button or the voice button of the currentlyplaying demo to stop playback. 5. Exit from Demo mode. Press the [DEMO] button to exit from Demo mode and return to normal play mode. The voice button indicators will stop flashing in sequence. 16 CLP-130/120 Listening to the Demonstration Tunes TIP For a list of the demo songs, see page 66. NOTE MIDI reception is not possible in Demo Song mode. Demo song data is not transmitted via the MIDI connectors. NOTE Demo mode cannot be engaged while a user song recorder (page 30) or user song playback (page 35) is in use. TERMINOLOGY Mode: A mode is a status under which you can execute a certain function. In Demo mode, you can play back demonstration tunes. NOTE You cannot adjust the tempo of demo songs. You cannot use the part cancel function (page 45) or the song A–B repeat function (page 20) in Demo mode. NOTE On the CLP-130, you can demo the piano voices with various effects by pressing the [VARIATION] button, then pressing the desired voice button. Refer to the “Piano Voice Demo Description” on page 66 for the complete list of demo sounds for the piano voices with various effects. Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs The Clavinova provides performance data of 50 piano songs. You can simply listen to these songs (page 17) or use them for practice (page 18). You can also refer to the included “50 Greats for the Piano” that contains scores for 50 piano preset songs. 2 -1 1 4 MAX START/STOP BRIGHT BRILLIANCE GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE VARIATION CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR GUITAR WOOD BASS E.BASS SPLIT TEMPO/ OTHER VALUE MASTER VOLUME DEMO METRONOME TEMPO FUNCTION — /NO +/ YES PRESET USER 1 USER 2 USER 3 TRACK 1 TRACK 2 START/STOP REC SONG TEMPO / FUNCTION VOICE ROOM HALL 1 HALL 2 STAGE REVERB CHORUS PHASER TREMOLO DELAY EFFECT HARD MEDIUM SOFT ON TOUCH TRANSPOSE ENGLISH MIN MELLOW 2 -2 3 Procedure 1. Engage Preset Song mode. Press the [PRESET] button to engage Preset Song mode. The [PRESET], [TRACK1] and [TRACK2] indicators will light. 2. Play any of the 50 preset songs. 2-1 2-2 Press the [–/NO], [+/YES] buttons to select the number of the tune you want to play (the number will appear on the LED display). 1 – 50: Select a preset song number and play only the song. ALL: Play all preset songs in sequence. rnd: Play all preset songs continuously in random order. TERMINOLOGY song number Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to start playback. You can play the keyboard along with the preset song. You can change the voice playing on the keyboard. Use the [MASTER VOLUME] control to adjust the volume. Adjust the tempo You can use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION# ▼ ▲] buttons to adjust the playback tempo 3. Stop playback. Song: On the CLP-130/120, performance data is called a “Song.” This includes demonstration tunes and piano preset tunes. TIP Adjust the Volume as required. The default tempo can be recalled by simultaneously pressing the [▼] and [▲] buttons. NOTE Preset Song mode cannot be engaged while the unit is in Demo Song mode (page 16), while a song is playing back (page 35), or when the user song recorder (page 30) is in use. TIP This produces a relative tempo variation, with a range from “–50” through “---” to “50” at maximum; the range will differ depending on the selected song. Playback will stop automatically when the selected preset song has finished. To stop the song during playback (or continuous playback), press the SONG [START/STOP] button. • To play back another song continuously, see procedure 2 above. You can adjust the Brilliance control (page 22) and Reverb type (page 22) that is applied to the voice you play on the keyboard and for the preset song playback. You can change the Effect type (page 23) and Touch sensitivity (page 24) for the keyboard voice. NOTE The default tempo “---” is automatically selected whenever a new preset song is selected, or when playback of a new preset song begins during “ALL” or “rnd” playback. NOTE When you select a different song (or a different song is selected during chained playback), an appropriate reverb type will be selected accordingly. CLP-130/120 Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs 17 4. Exit from Preset Song mode. Press the [PRESET] button to exit Preset Song mode. The indicator turns off, and the unit returns to normal play mode. NOTE MIDI reception is not possible in Piano Song mode. Piano song data is not transmitted via the MIDI connectors. ENGLISH How to use the practice functions You can turn the left- and right-hand parts on or off as required so you can practice the corresponding part (part cancel function) and continuously repeat a specified phrase within a song (song A-B repeat function). For more information, see pages 18–20. Practicing a One-Hand Part Using 50 Preset Songs (Part Cancel Function) The 50 preset songs have separate left- and right-hand parts on individual tracks. You can turn the left- and right-hand parts on or off as required so you can practice the corresponding part (the part that is turned off) on the keyboard. The right-hand part is played by [TRACK1] and the left-hand part is played by [TRACK2]. 1 MIN MAX START/STOP BRIGHT BRILLIANCE 3 GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE VARIATION CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR GUITAR WOOD BASS E.BASS SPLIT TEMPO/ OTHER VALUE MASTER VOLUME MELLOW 2 DEMO METRONOME TEMPO FUNCTION — /NO +/ YES TEMPO / FUNCTION PRESET USER 1 USER 2 USER 3 TRACK 1 TRACK 2 START/STOP REC SONG VOICE ROOM HALL 1 HALL 2 STAGE REVERB CHORUS PHASER TREMOLO DELAY EFFECT HARD MEDIUM SOFT ON TOUCH TRANSPOSE Procedure 1. Turn off the playback part you wish to practice. After you select a song to practice, press the [TRACK1] or [TRACK2] button to turn off the corresponding part. When you first select a song, both [TRACK1] and [TRACK2] indicators light up, indicating that you can play back both parts. When you press one of the buttons to turn off playback, the corresponding button indicator turns off and the corresponding part playback is muted. • Pressing the buttons repeatedly toggles playback between on and off. 2. Start playback and playing. Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to start playback. Play the part you just turned off. 18 CLP-130/120 Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs NOTE The Preset Song Part Cancel function cannot be used during “ALL” or “rnd” (page 17) playback. TIP The parts can be turned on or off even during playback. TIP The “Preset Song Part Cancel Volume” function described on page 45 can be used to set the canceled part so that it plays at a volume from “0” (no sound) to “20”. The normal setting is “5”. Starting playback automatically as you start playing the keyboard (Synchro Start) When the Synchro Start function is engaged, playback of the selected preset song will begin automatically as soon as you start playing on the keyboard. To engage the Synchro Start function press the song number SONG [START/STOP] button while holding the synchro start mark part button for the ON part. A dot will appear in the lower right corner of the display. (Repeat the previous operation to disengage the Synchro Start function.) Playback will then start as soon as you begin playing on the keyboard. NOTE If you hold a track button that is OFF while pressing the SONG [START/STOP] button, that track will be turned ON and the unit will engage Synchro Start mode. The left pedal can be assigned to start and stop preset song playback via the “Left Pedal Mode” function described on page 44. NOTE Both parts are automatically turned ON whenever a new song is selected. 3. Stop playback. When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova locates the top of the song. If you wish to stop playback in the middle of a song, press the SONG[START/STOP] button. CLP-130/120 Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs ENGLISH Left Pedal Start/Stop 19 A-B Repeat for 50 Preset Songs The A-B Repeat function can be used to continuously repeat a specified phrase within a preset song. Combined with the Part Cancel function described below, this provides an excellent way to practice difficult phrases. 1 MIN MAX ENGLISH START/STOP BRIGHT BRILLIANCE GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE VARIATION CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR GUITAR WOOD BASS E.BASS SPLIT TEMPO/ OTHER VALUE MASTER VOLUME MELLOW 2 DEMO METRONOME TEMPO FUNCTION — /NO +/ YES PRESET USER 1 USER 2 USER 3 TRACK 1 TRACK 2 START/STOP REC SONG TEMPO / FUNCTION VOICE ROOM HALL 1 HALL 2 STAGE REVERB CHORUS PHASER TREMOLO DELAY EFFECT HARD MEDIUM SOFT ON TOUCH TRANSPOSE Procedure 1. Specify the beginning (A) and the end (B) of the phrase, and start practicing. Select and play a preset song, then press the [TEMPO/ FUNCTION#] button at the beginning of the phrase you want to repeat. This sets the “A” point ( play). will appear on the dis- To specify the end (B) of the phrase, press the [TEMPO/ FUNCTION#] button a second time at the end of the phrase. This sets the “B” point ( will appear on the display). At this point, repeat playback will begin between the specified A and B points. NOTE The A-B Repeat function cannot be used during “ALL” or “rnd” (page 17) playback. NOTE • To set the “A” point at the very beginning of the song, press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION#] button before starting playback. • To set the B point at the song’s end, press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION#] button after song playback is complete and before disappears from the display. TIP 2. Stop playback. Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to stop playback while retaining the specified A and B points. A-B repeat playback will resume if you press the SONG [START/STOP] button again. An automatic lead-in (to help guide you into the phrase) starts at the A point of the song. However, when the A point is set at the beginning of the song, the automatic lead-in is not played. To cancel the A and B points, press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION#] button once. NOTE The A and B points are automatically canceled when a new song is selected. 20 CLP-130/120 Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs Selecting & Playing Voices Selecting Voices Voice buttons MAX MELLOW START/STOP BRIGHT BRILLIANCE GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE VARIATION GUITAR WOOD BASS E.BASS SPLIT TEMPO/ OTHER VALUE MASTER VOLUME DEMO METRONOME TEMPO FUNCTION — /NO +/ YES PRESET USER 1 USER 2 USER 3 TEMPO / FUNCTION TRACK 1 TRACK 2 START/STOP REC STRINGS SONG CHOIR VOICE ROOM HALL 1 HALL 2 STAGE REVERB CHORUS PHASER TREMOLO DELAY EFFECT HARD MEDIUM SOFT ON TOUCH TRANSPOSE Procedure Select the desired voice by pressing one of the [VOICE] buttons. TIP Then, when you start playing, re-adjust the [MASTER VOLUME] control for the most comfortable listening level. To learn characteristics of the voices, listen to demo songs for each voice (page 16). Refer to “Preset Voice List” on page 63 for more information on the characteristics of each preset voice. ENGLISH MIN TERMINOLOGY Voice: On the Clavinova, a voice means a “tone” or “tonal color.” TIP You can control the loudness of a voice by adjusting the force with which you strike the keys, although different playing styles (touch sensitivities) have little or no effect with certain musical instruments. Refer to “Preset Voice List” on page 63. Using the Pedals The Clavinova has three foot pedals that produce a range of expressive effects similar to those produced by the pedals on an acoustic piano. Damper (Right) Pedal The damper pedal functions in the same way as a damper pedal on an acoustic piano. When the damper pedal is pressed, notes sustain longer. Releasing the pedal immediately stops (damps) any sustained notes. When you select the GRAND PIANO 1 voice on the CLP130, pressing the damper pedal activates the instrument’s special “Sustain Samples” to accurately recreate the unique resonance of an acoustic grand piano’s soundboard and strings. NOTE If the damper pedal doesn’t work, make sure that the pedal cord is properly plugged into the main unit (page 61: CLP-130, page 58: CLP-120). TIP When you press the damper pedal here, the notes you play before you release the pedal have a longer sustain. The depth of the effect produced by the “Sustain Samples” can be adjusted via the “Pedal Functions” (page 44) in Function mode. CLP-130/120 Selecting & Playing Voices 21 Sostenuto (Center) Pedal If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the sostenuto pedal while the note(s) are held, those notes will sustain as long as you hold the pedal (as if the damper pedal had been pressed) but all subsequently played notes will not be sustained. This makes it possible to sustain a chord, for example, while other notes are played “staccato.” TIP Organ, string and choir voices will continue to sound for as long as the sostenuto pedal is depressed. When you press the sostenuto pedal here while holding the note, the note will sustain as long as you hold the pedal. ENGLISH Soft (Left) Pedal The soft pedal reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes played while the pedal is pressed. The soft pedal will not affect notes that are already playing when it is pressed. TIP The left pedal can be assigned to song start/stop operation or variation function (CLP-130) via the “Left Pedal Mode” described on page 44. Adding Variations to the Sound – [VARIATION] (CLP-130)/[BRILLIANCE]/[REVERB]/[EFFECT] [—/NO] [+/YES] [BRILLIANCE] MIN MAX START/STOP BRIGHT BRILLIANCE [REVERB] GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE VARIATION CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR GUITAR WOOD BASS E.BASS SPLIT TEMPO/ OTHER VALUE MASTER VOLUME MELLOW [VARIATION] DEMO METRONOME TEMPO FUNCTION TEMPO / FUNCTION — /NO +/ YES PRESET USER 1 USER 2 USER 3 TRACK 1 TRACK 2 START/STOP REC SONG VOICE ROOM HALL 1 HALL 2 STAGE REVERB CHORUS PHASER TREMOLO DELAY EFFECT [EFFECT] HARD MEDIUM SOFT ON TOUCH TRANSPOSE [VARIATION] (CLP-130) Lets you alter another aspect of the effect, depending on the selected type. Refer to “Preset Voice List” on page 63 for more information on the characteristics of each variation. TIP Normal setting = OFF TERMINOLOGY Procedure Pressing the [VARIATION] or selected voice button toggles the variation on and off. The indicator lights (ON) each time the [VARIATION] button is pressed. [BRILLIANCE] This control can be used to change the tonality or “timbre” of the sound output. The control range is from MELLOW to BRIGHT. [REVERB] This control enables you to select various digital reverb effects that would add extra depth and expression to the sound to create a realistic acoustic ambience. OFF: When no reverb effect is selected, no REVERB indicator is lit. ROOM: This setting adds a continuous reverb effect to the sound, similar to the acoustic reverberation you would hear in a room. HALL 1: For a “bigger” reverb sound, use the HALL 1 setting. This effect simulates the natural reverberation of a small-size concert hall. HALL 2: For a truly spacious reverb sound, use the HALL 2 setting. This effect simulates the natural reverberation of a large concert hall. STAGE: Simulates the reverb of a stage environment. 22 CLP-130/120 Selecting & Playing Voices Normal setting: The “Normal setting” refers to the default setting (factory setting) obtained when you first turn on the power to the Clavinova. TIP The left pedal can be assigned to ON or OFF the variation via the “Left Pedal Mode” function described on page 44 (CLP130). NOTE When the BRILLIANCE is set to BRIGHT, the overall sound will be slightly louder. If the MASTER VOLUME is set at a high level the sound may become distorted. If so, lower the MASTER VOLUME level. TIP The default reverb type (including OFF) and depth settings are different for each voice. Procedure Pressing the [REVERB] button repeatedly toggles the reverb on and off. The indicators light in sequence each time the [REVERB] button is pressed. No effect is produced when all indicators are off. Even if the REVERB effect is OFF, a “Soundboard Reverb” effect will be applied when the GRAND PIANO 1 voice is selected. TIP depth 0: no effect depth 20: maximum reverb depth depth TIP [EFFECT] Default depth settings are different for each voice. The [EFFECT] button allows you to select an effect to give your sound greater depth and animation. OFF: CHORUS: PHASER: TREMOLO: DELAY: ENGLISH Adjusting Reverb Depth Adjust the reverb depth for the selected voice by using the [–/NO] [+/YES] buttons while holding the [REVERB] button. The depth range is from 0 through 20. The current depth setting appears on the LED display while the [REVERB] button is held. TIP Releasing the [REVERB] button changes the reverb type. If you are changing the reverb depth by holding the [REVERB] button, pressing the [REVERB] button will not change the reverb type. TIP The default effect type (including OFF) and depth settings are different for each voice. When no effect is selected, no EFFECT indicator is lit. A shimmering, broadening effect Adds a sweeping effect to the sound. Tremolo effect Echo effect Procedure To select an effect type press the [EFFECT] button a few times until the indicator corresponding to the desired type lights (the indicators light in sequence each time you press the [EFFECT] button). No effect is produced when all indicators are off. Adjusting Effect Depth You can adjust the effect depth for the selected voice by using the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons while holding the [EFFECT] button. The depth range is from 0 through 20. The current depth setting appears on the LED display while the [EFFECT] button is held. TIP Releasing the [EFFECT] button changes the effect type. If you are changing the depth settings by holding the [EFFECT] button, pressing the [EFFECT] button will not change the effect type. depth TIP depth 0: no effect depth 20: maximum effect depth TIP Default depth settings are different for each voice. CLP-130/120 Selecting & Playing Voices 23 Touch Sensitivity – [TOUCH] You can select four different types of keyboard touch sensitivity — HARD, MEDIUM, SOFT or FIXED — to match different playing styles and preferences. HARD: TIP Requires that the keys be played quite hard to produce maximum loudness. Produces a fairly “standard” keyboard response. Allows maximum loudness to be produced with relatively light key pressure. All notes are produced at the same volume no matter how hard the keyboard is played. You can adjust the volume. MEDIUM: SOFT: ENGLISH FIXED: This setting does not change the weight of the keyboard. TIP Normal setting = MEDIUM TIP The touch sensitivity type will become the common setting for all voices. However, the touch sensitivity settings may have little or no effect with certain voices that are not normally responsive to keyboard dynamics. (Refer to the “Preset Voice List” on page 63.) [—/NO] [+/YES] MIN MAX START/STOP BRIGHT BRILLIANCE GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE VARIATION CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR GUITAR WOOD BASS E.BASS SPLIT TEMPO/ OTHER VALUE MASTER VOLUME MELLOW [TOUCH] DEMO METRONOME TEMPO FUNCTION — /NO +/ YES PRESET TEMPO / FUNCTION USER 1 USER 2 USER 3 TRACK 1 TRACK 2 START/STOP REC SONG VOICE ROOM HALL 1 HALL 2 STAGE CHORUS PHASER TREMOLO DELAY REVERB EFFECT HARD MEDIUM SOFT ON TOUCH TRANSPOSE Procedure To select a touch sensitivity type press the [TOUCH] button a few times until the indicator corresponding to the desired type lights (the indicators light in sequence each time the [TOUCH] button is pressed). No indicator is lit when “FIXED” is selected. Changing the volume when FIXED is selected When you select FIXED, you can set the volume for notes played in FIXED mode by using the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons while you hold the [TOUCH] button. The current volume level appears on the display. The volume range is from 1 through 127. The default setting is 64. TIP 1: minimum volume 127: maximum volume volume range TIP The touch volume set in FIXED mode will become the common setting for all voices. TIP Releasing the [TOUCH] button changes the touch type. If you are changing the volume by holding the [TOUCH] button, pressing the [TOUCH] button will not change the touch sensitivity type. (FIXED mode will remain selected.) 24 CLP-130/120 Selecting & Playing Voices Transposition – [TRANSPOSE] The Clavinova’s Transpose function makes it possible to shift the pitch of the entire keyboard up or down in semitone intervals to facilitate playing in difficult key signatures, and to let you easily match the pitch of the keyboard to the range of a singer or other instruments. For example, if you set the transposition amount to “5,” playing key C produces pitch F. In this way, you can play a song as though it were in C major, and the Clavinova will transpose it to the key of F. [—/NO] [+/YES] MAX START/STOP BRIGHT BRILLIANCE GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE VARIATION CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR GUITAR WOOD BASS E.BASS SPLIT TEMPO/ OTHER VALUE MASTER VOLUME DEMO METRONOME TEMPO FUNCTION TEMPO / FUNCTION — /NO +/ YES PRESET USER 1 USER 2 USER 3 TRACK 1 TRACK 2 START/STOP REC SONG VOICE ROOM HALL 1 HALL 2 STAGE REVERB CHORUS PHASER TREMOLO DELAY EFFECT HARD MEDIUM SOFT ON TOUCH TRANSPOSE ENGLISH MIN MELLOW [TRANSPOSE] Procedure Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] button while holding the [TRANSPOSE] button to transpose down or up as required. The amount of transposition appears on the LED display while the [TRANSPOSE] button is held. The default transpose setting is “0”. TERMINOLOGY transposition The [TRANSPOSE] button indicator remains lit when a transpose setting other than “0” is selected. Every time the [TRANSPOSE] button is pressed after that switches the transpose function ON or OFF. Transpose: Changing the key signature of a song. On the Clavinova, transposing shifts the pitch of the entire keyboard. TIP The transposition range: –12: –12 semitones (down one octave) 0: normal pitch 12: 12 semitones (up one octave) TIP Notes below and above the A-1 …. C7 range of the CLP-130/ 120 sound one octave higher and lower, respectively. CLP-130/120 Selecting & Playing Voices 25 Combining Two Voices (Dual mode) You can play two voices simultaneously across the entire range of the keyboard. In this way, you can simulate a melody duet or combine two similar voices to create a thicker sound. 1 MIN MAX ENGLISH START/STOP BRIGHT BRILLIANCE GRAND PIANO 2 JAZZ ORGAN E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE VARIATION GUITAR WOOD BASS E.BASS SPLIT TEMPO/ OTHER VALUE MASTER VOLUME MELLOW GRAND PIANO 1 CHURCH ORGAN 2 DEMO METRONOME TEMPO FUNCTION — /NO +/ YES PRESET USER 1 USER 2 USER 3 TRACK 1 TRACK 2 START/STOP REC STRINGS CHOIR SONG TEMPO / FUNCTION VOICE ROOM HALL 1 HALL 2 STAGE REVERB CHORUS PHASER TREMOLO DELAY EFFECT HARD MEDIUM SOFT ON TOUCH TRANSPOSE Procedure 1. Engage Dual mode. NOTE (CLP-130) Press two voice buttons at the same time (or press one voice button while holding another). The voice indicators of both selected voices will light when Dual mode is active. • According to the voice numbering priority shown in the diagram on the right, the lower value voice number will be designated as Voice 1 (the other voice will be designated as Voice 2). Voice numbering priority 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR GUITAR WOOD BASS E.BASS 13 14 VOICE 8 9 10 11 12 The CLP-130/120 Function mode provides access to a number of other Dual mode functions, such as volume balance setting or octave setting (page 42). (If you do not set Dual mode functions, the appropriate setting will be set in each voice by default.) 2. Exit Dual mode and return to normal play mode. To return to the normal single-voice play mode, press any single voice button. Dual and Split (page 27) modes cannot be engaged at the same time. TIP [VARIATION] in Dual Mode (CLP-130) The [VARIATION] button’s indicator will light if the variation is engaged for either or both of the Dual mode voices. While Dual mode is engaged, the [VARIATION] button can be used to turn the variation for both voices on or off. To turn the variation on or off for only one of the voices, hold the voice button for the other voice and press the button of the voice for which you want to change the variation. TIP [REVERB] in Dual Mode The reverb type assigned to Voice 1 will take priority over the other. (If the reverb is set to OFF, Voice 2 reverb type will be in effect.) Reverb depth setting via the panel controls (i.e., pressing the [–/NO] or [+/YES] buttons while holding the [REVERB] button — see page 22) will be applied only to Voice 1. TIP [EFFECT] in Dual Mode Depending on the conditions, one effect type may take priority over the other. Depth will be decided according to the depth default value of the voice combination. However, using function F3 (page 42) you can adjust the depth value for each voice to your liking. Effect depth setting via the panel controls (i.e., pressing the [–/ NO] or [+/YES] buttons while holding the [EFFECT] button — see page 23) will be applied only to Voice 1. 26 CLP-130/120 Selecting & Playing Voices Splitting the Keyboard Range and Playing Two Different Voices (Split mode) (CLP-130) Split mode enables you to play two different voices on the keyboard — one with the left hand and another with the right hand. For example, you can play a bass part using the Wood Bass or Electric Bass voice with the left hand, and a melody with the right hand. Voice buttons MAX START/STOP BRIGHT BRILLIANCE GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE VARIATION CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR GUITAR WOOD BASS E.BASS SPLIT TEMPO/ OTHER VALUE MASTER VOLUME DEMO METRONOME TEMPO FUNCTION — /NO +/ YES PRESET USER 1 USER 2 USER 3 TRACK 1 TRACK 2 START/STOP REC SONG TEMPO / FUNCTION VOICE ROOM HALL 1 HALL 2 STAGE REVERB CHORUS PHASER TREMOLO DELAY EFFECT HARD MEDIUM SOFT ON TOUCH TRANSPOSE ENGLISH MIN MELLOW [SPLIT] Procedure 1. Engage Split mode. Press the [SPLIT] button so that its indicator lights. The default setting (WOOD BASE) will be selected for the left-hand voice at first. The Function mode provides access to a number of other Split mode functions (page 43). (If you make no settings for Split mode functions, the appropriate setting will be set in each voice by default.) NOTE Dual (page 26) and Split (page 26) modes cannot be engaged simultaneously. 2. Specify the split point (the border between the right-and left-hand range). You can change the split point to any other key by pressing the key while holding the [SPLIT] button (the name of the current split-point key appears on the LED display while the [SPLIT] button is held). An example of split-point key display TIP A specified “split point” key is included in the left-hand range. TIP The split point can also be set via Function 4 (page 43). (F 2) (G2) followed by a high bar if sharp (A 2) followed by a low bar if flat The split point is initially set at the F 2 key by default. If you do not need to change the split point, skip this procedure. CLP-130/120 Selecting & Playing Voices 27 3. Select a voice for the right hand. Press a voice button. 4. Select a voice for the left hand. Press the corresponding voice button while holding the [SPLIT] button. (The indicator of the Left Voice button will light while the [SPLIT] button is pressed.) To turn the variation on or off for the split voice, hold the [SPLIT] button and press the [VARIATION] button or the currently-selected voice button. 5. Exit Split mode and return to normal play mode. ENGLISH Press the [SPLIT] button again so that its indicator goes out. TIP [VARIATION] in Split Mode You can turn the variation on or off for Split mode voices. Normally, the voice indicator of the right voice lights in Split mode. The [VARIATION] can be used to turn the variation for the right voice on or off as required. While the [SPLIT] button is held, however, the voice indicator of the left voice lights. In this state the [VARIATION] button turns the variation for the left voice on or off. TIP [REVERB] in Split Mode The reverb type assigned to the right voice will take priority over the other. (If the reverb is set to OFF, the left voice’s reverb type will be in effect.) Reverb depth setting via the panel controls (i.e. pressing the [–/NO] or [+/ YES] buttons while holding the [REVERB] button — see page 22) will be applied to the right voice only. TIP [EFFECT] in Split Mode Depending on the conditions, one effect type will take priority over the other. The depth will be decided according to the depth default value of the voice combination. However, using function F4 (page 43) you can change the depth value for each voice as you like. Effect depth setting via the panel controls (i.e. pressing the [–/NO] or [+/YES] buttons while holding the [EFFECT] button — see page 23) will be applied to the right voice only. 28 CLP-130/120 Selecting & Playing Voices Using the Metronome The Clavinova features a built-in metronome (a device that keeps an accurate tempo) that is convenient for practicing. 1 2 MIN [TEMPO/FUNCTION# ▲▼] MAX START/STOP BRIGHT BRILLIANCE GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE VARIATION GUITAR WOOD BASS E.BASS SPLIT TEMPO/ OTHER VALUE MASTER VOLUME MELLOW [—/NO] [+/YES] DEMO METRONOME TEMPO FUNCTION — /NO +/ YES PRESET USER 1 USER 2 USER 3 TEMPO / FUNCTION TRACK 1 TRACK 2 START/STOP REC STRINGS CHOIR SONG VOICE ROOM HALL 1 HALL 2 STAGE REVERB CHORUS PHASER TREMOLO DELAY EFFECT HARD MEDIUM SOFT ON TOUCH TRANSPOSE ENGLISH Procedure 1. Start the metronome. The metronome sound is turned on by pressing the METRONOME [START/STOP] button. The beat indicator flashes at the current tempo. Adjusting the tempo The tempo of the metronome and user song recorder playback (the recorder is described in the next section) can be set from 32 to 280 beats per minute by using the [TEMPO/FUNCTION# ▼, ▲] buttons (when the [TEMPO/FUNCTION# ▼, ▲] button’s [TEMPO] indicator is lit). Adjusting the time signature The time signature (beat) of the metronome can be set by using the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons while holding the METRONOME [START/STOP] button. You can set the beat to 0, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6. The current setting appears on the LED display while you are holding the METRONOME [START/STOP] button. TIP If the [TEMPO/FUNCTION#] button’s [FUNCTION#] indicator is lit, press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION#] button to light the [TEMPO] indicator. TIP beat The volume of the metronome can be adjusted via the Metronome Volume function in Function mode (page 45). 2. Stop the metronome. Turn off the metronome by pressing the METRONOME [START/STOP] button. CLP-130/120 Selecting & Playing Voices 29 CLP130(E).book Page 30 Thursday, October 31, 2002 2:45 PM Recording Your Performance The ability to record and play back what you’ve played on the CLP130/120 keyboard can be an effective practice aid. You can, for example, record just the left-hand part, and then practice the right-hand part while playing back the recorded left-hand part. Or, since you can record up to two tracks separately, you could record the left- and righthand parts separately, or record both parts of a duet and hear how they sound when played back. The CLP-130/120’s two-track Song Recorder allows the recording of up to three User Songs (one User Song on the CLP-120). TIP You can record your performance (audio data) to a cassette tape recorder or other recording device via the AUX OUT connector (page 50). TERMINOLOGY ENGLISH Recording vs. Saving: The format of performance data recorded on a cassette tape differs from that of data recorded on the Clavinova. A cassette tape records audio signals. The Clavinova “saves” information regarding note timing, voices, and a tempo value, but not audio signals. When you play back recorded songs, the Clavinova produces sound based on the saved information. Therefore, recording on the Clavinova may be more accurately called “saving information.” However, this book often uses the word “recording” because it seems to make more sense. Recording to [TRACK1] 1 4 5 6 7 MIN MAX START/STOP BRIGHT BRILLIANCE GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE VARIATION CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR GUITAR WOOD BASS E.BASS SPLIT TEMPO/ OTHER VALUE MASTER VOLUME MELLOW 2 3 DEMO METRONOME TEMPO FUNCTION — /NO +/ YES TEMPO / FUNCTION PRESET USER 1 USER 2 USER 3 TRACK 1 TRACK 2 START/STOP REC SONG REVERB CHORUS PHASER TREMOLO DELAY EFFECT HARD MEDIUM SOFT ON TOUCH TRANSPOSE Procedure NOTE (CLP-130) CAUTION When the unit is in Demo Song mode, the [USER 1/2/3] button cannot be used to select a song. Notes on recording All user song recorder data will be retained in memory for about one week after the power is turned off. If you want to keep your recorded data for longer periods of time, turn the power on for a few minutes at least once a week. It is also possible to store the data to an external MIDI storage device such as the Yamaha MIDI Data Filer MDF3 by using the Bulk Data Dump function described on page 47. 1. Select a song for recording. (CLP-130) Press the [USER 1/2/3] button to select a song for recording. The indicator of the selected song will light. (No song is selected if none of the indicators are lit.) 2. Make all the initial settings. Before you begin to record, select the voice you want to record (or voices if you will be using Dual or Split mode). Make any other desired settings (tempo, reverb, etc.) as well. You might also want to set the volume. You can also adjust the playback volume using [MASTER VOLUME]. 30 VOICE ROOM HALL 1 HALL 2 STAGE CLP-130/120 Recording Your Performance NOTE When the unit is in Demo Song or Preset Song mode, Record mode cannot be engaged. NOTE To avoid erasing data from the track: CLP-130 If the track contains data, the track indicator lights up green when you press the [USER1/2/ 3] button. Note that recording new data on this track will erase the existing data. CLP-120 Press the [TRACK1/2] button. If the indicator lights up green, the track already contains data. Note that the existing data will be erased if you record new data on the track. 3. Engage Record Ready mode. NOTE flash Record Ready mode can be disengaged before recording by pressing the [REC] button a second time. 4. Select the record track. When Record mode is engaged in the previous step, the last-recorded track will automatically be selected for recording and its indicator — i.e. the [TRACK1] or [TRACK2] button indicator — will glow red. If you want to record on a different track, press the appropriate track button so that its indicator glows red. 5. Start recording. The amount of memory available for recording: This value in KiloBytes (a unit used of measurement for data) indicates how much space remains available for recording on the Clavinova. You can record up to a maximum of about 9,400 notes on the CLP130/120 depending on pedal usage and other factors. TIP (CLP-130) If a user song ([USER 1/2/3]) is not selected (the lamp is not lit), pressing the [REC] button will result in the [USER 1] song’s [TRACK1] being selected and Record Ready mode engaged. At this time, [TRACK2] playback will be turned off if the track contains data. ENGLISH Press the [REC] button to engage Record Ready mode. Recording does not actually start yet. The [TRACK1] or the [TRACK2] indicator flashes in red. The amount of memory available for recording will be shown on the LED display in approximate kilobytes, and the right-most dot on the LED display will flash at the current METRONOME tempo setting. TIP Recording will begin automatically as soon as you play a note on the keyboard or press the SONG [START/STOP] button. The current measure number will appear on the display while recording. If the metronome was on when you started recording, you’ll be able to keep time with the metronome while recording, but the metronome sound will not be recorded. TIP 6. Stop recording. For more recording information, see page 33. Press either the [REC] or SONG [START/STOP] button to stop recording. The indicator of the recorded track will glow green to indicate that it now contains data. (Record mode is disengaged automatically.) 7. Play back the recorded performance. Press the SONG[START/STOP] button to play back the recorded performance. To stop playback in the middle of a song, press the SONG[START/STOP] button. TIP The left pedal can be assigned to start and stop recording via the “Left Pedal Mode” function described on page 44. NOTE The record track indicator will begin to flash when the recorder memory is almost full. If the memory becomes full during recording, “FUL” will appear on the display and recording will stop automatically. (All recorded data up to that point will be retained.) NOTE Pressing the SONG [START/ STOP] button to start recording, then pressing it again to stop recording will erase all previously-recorded data on the selected track. CLP-130/120 Recording Your Performance 31 Re-recording TRACK1 This section explains how to record again in case your performance was not satisfactory. 1. Select a voice or voices (and other settings) for recording, if necessary. Repeat Step 1 on page 30 if you wish to change the previous settings. 2. Re-engage Record Ready mode. Press the [REC] button, again. The selected track’s indicator flashes in red. ENGLISH Follow the procedure from Step 5 on page 31 to re-record. TIP If you want to change the tempo, time signature, reverb type, or effect type when rerecording a track or when recording to another track, do so after you engage Record Ready mode (step 3). NOTE You cannot re-record in the middle of a song. Recording to [TRACK2] This section explains how to record another part on the second track. 1. Select a voice or voices (and other settings) for the recording. Select a voice (or voices) for recording. Select other settings, if necessary. 2. Re-engage Record Ready mode. Press the [REC] button again. The selected track’s indicator flashes in red. 3. Select a recording track. Select a track that you have not already used for recording. The selected track’s indicator lights up red. (The indicator of a track that contains previously-recorded data will glow green.) You can record new sounds and notes on each pass while listening to the recorded track. Follow the procedure from Step 5 on page 31 to record. 32 CLP-130/120 Recording Your Performance TIP If you want to change the tempo, time signature, reverb type, or effect type when rerecording a track or when recording to another track, do so after entering Record Ready mode (step 3). NOTE If you don’t want to hear the previously-recorded track while you record (for example, when you want to record a song different from what you recorded on the previous track), press the playback track button before pressing the [REC] button (step 2, above) so that its indicator is turned off. The user song recorder records the following data: Data in addition to the notes and voices you play is recorded. This data includes “Individual Tracks” and “Entire Song.” See below. ENGLISH Individual Tracks • Notes played • Voice selection • [VARIATION] ON/OFF (CLP-130) • Pedal (Damper/Soft/Sostenuto) • [REVERB] depth • [EFFECT] depth • Dual mode voices • Dual balance (F3) • Dual detune (F3) • Dual octave shift (F3) • Split mode voices (CLP-130) • Split balance (F4: CLP-130) • Split octave shift (F4:CLP-130) Entire Song • Tempo • Time signature (beat) • [REVERB] type (including OFF) • [EFFECT] type (including OFF) CLP-130/120 Recording Your Performance 33 Changing the Initial Settings (Data recorded at the beginning of a song) The initial settings (data recorded at the beginning of a song) can be changed after the recording. For example, after recording, you can change the voice to create a different ambience or adjust the song tempo to your taste. ENGLISH You can change the following initial settings. Individual Tracks • Voice selection • [VARIATION] ON/OFF (CLP-130) • [REVERB] depth • [EFFECT] depth • Dual mode voices • Split mode voices (CLP-130) Entire Song • Tempo • Time signature (beat) • [REVERB] type (including OFF) • [EFFECT] type (including OFF) 1. Engage Record mode and select a track to change the initial settings. The indicator glows red. (Data shared by two tracks can be changed via either track.) 2. Change the settings via the panel controls. For example, if you wish to change the recorded voice from [E. PIANO 1] to [E. PIANO 2], press the [E. PIANO 2] button. Be careful not to press the SONG [START/STOP] button or a key on the keyboard, either of which will start recording and erase all previously-recorded data on the selected track. 3. Press the [REC] button to exit Record mode. Be careful not to press the SONG [START/STOP] button or a key on the keyboard, either of which will start recording and erase all previously-recorded data on the selected track. 34 CLP-130/120 Recording Your Performance NOTE You can cancel changes made to the initial settings by selecting a different track after Step 2, then exiting Record mode during Step 3 without pressing the [REC] button. (Changes made to the data shared by two tracks are also canceled.) Playing Back Recorded Songs You can play back songs recorded using the Record function (pages 30–34). You can also play the keyboard along with the playback. NOTE Song data is not transmitted via the MIDI connectors. Playing Back a Song MIN MAX START/STOP BRIGHT BRILLIANCE GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE VARIATION CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR GUITAR WOOD BASS E.BASS SPLIT TEMPO/ OTHER VALUE MASTER VOLUME MELLOW 2 3 DEMO METRONOME TEMPO FUNCTION TEMPO / FUNCTION — /NO +/ YES PRESET USER 1 USER 2 USER 3 TRACK 1 TRACK 2 START/STOP REC SONG VOICE ROOM HALL 1 HALL 2 STAGE CHORUS PHASER TREMOLO DELAY REVERB EFFECT HARD MEDIUM SOFT ON TOUCH TRANSPOSE NOTE (CLP-130) Procedure ENGLISH 1 When the unit is in Demo Song mode, you cannot use the [USER 1/2/3] button to select a song. 1. Select the desired song. (CLP-130) Press the [USER 1/2/3] button to select a song for recording. The indicator of the selected song will light. (No song is selected if none of the indicators are lit.) 2. Start playback. NOTE When the unit is in Demo Song or Preset Song mode, you cannot play back recorded songs. NOTE Press the SONG [START/STOP] button. The current measure number appears on the display during playback. • You can play the keyboard while the Clavinova is playing back a song. You can also play the notes in a voice different from the playback voice by selecting a voice from the panel. Adjust the volume The track indicators will not light up green automatically when the power is turned on to the CLP120, even if the user song recorder contains data. Make sure that you press the track buttons before you start playback. NOTE Playback cannot be started when the recorder contains no data. TIP Use the [MASTER VOLUME] control to adjust the volume. Adjust the tempo You can use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION# ▼, ▲] buttons to adjust the playback tempo as required before or during playback. The default tempo (the song’s original tempo) is set when you press the [▼] and [▲] buttons simultaneously. 3. Stop playback. When playback is complete, the Clavinova automatically stops and locates the top of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song, press the SONG [START/STOP] button. You can also enjoy playing duets with yourself by recording one part of a duet or a song for two pianos, then playing the other part while the recorded part plays back. TIP If the metronome is being used during playback, the metronome will automatically stop when playback is stopped. TIP If the REVERB type is changed via the panel controls during playback, both the playback and keyboard reverb effects will be changed. TIP If the EFFECT type is changed via the panel controls during playback, the playback effect may be switched off in some cases. CLP-130/120 Playing Back Recorded Songs 35 Useful Playback Functions ENGLISH Turning track playback on and off When you select a song on the Clavinova, the indicators for tracks that contain data (one of [TRACK1] [TRACK2] or both) are lit in green. While the Clavinova is playing or stopped, pressing these track buttons turns off the indicators, and the data on those tracks is not played. Pressing the track buttons toggles track playback on and off. Starting playback automatically when you start playing the keyboard (Synchro Start) You can start playback as soon as you start playing the keyboard. This is called the “Synchro Start” function. To engage the Synchro Start function, press the SONG [START/STOP] button while holding a track button that is ON. The right-most dot on the display will flash at the current tempo. TIP You can adjust the volume of a part of a song from “50 Greats for the Piano” for which playback is turned off (pages 18, 45). During recorder playback, the volume of a track that is turned off will always be “0.” NOTE (Repeat the previous operation to disengage the Synchro Start function.) Flash Playback will then start as soon as you begin playing on the keyboard. This function is useful when you wish to match the timing of the beginning of the playback sound and the start of your own performance. Assigning the START/STOP function to the left pedal The left pedal can also be assigned to song start/stop operation via the “Pedal Start/ Stop” (page 44). This is convenient for starting playback of the recorded part anytime after you have started playing. 36 TIP Tracks can be turned on or off before or during playback. If both tracks are turned off on the CLP-120, playback will not start (or the playback will stop). CLP-130/120 Playing Back Recorded Songs If you press the SONG [START/ STOP] button while holding down a track button that is OFF, track playback is turned on and the Synchro Start function is placed on stand-by. TERMINOLOGY Synchro: Synchronous; occurring at the same time Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION] You can set various parameters to make the best use of Clavinova functions, such as fine tuning the pitch, selecting a voice for the metronome, repeating playback, etc. The following parameters are available. The CLP-130 has nine main functions, and the CLP-120 has eight main functions. Some of these main functions consist of a set of sub-modes. Function Sub-Mode CLP-130 CLP-120 Reference page Fine tuning of the pitch — F1 F1 40 Selecting a scale Scale F2.1 F2.1 41 Base Note F2.2 F2.2 41 Dual Balance F3.1 F3.1 42 Dual mode functions Split mode functions Other Functions Dual Detune F3.2 F3.2 42 Voice 1 Octave Shift F3.3 F3.3 42 Voice 2 Octave Shift F3.4 F3.4 42 Voice 1 Effect Depth F3.5 F3.5 42 Voice 2 Effect Depth F3.6 F3.6 42 Reset F3.7 F3.7 42 Split Point F4.1 — 43 Split Balance F4.2 — 43 Right Voice Octave Shift F4.3 — 43 Left Voice Octave Shift F4.4 — 43 Right Voice Effect Depth F4.5 — 43 Left Voice Effect Depth F4.6 — 43 Damper Pedal Range F4.7 — 43 Reset F4.8 — 43 Left Pedal Mode F5.1 F4.1 44 Soft Pedal Effect Depth F5.2 F4.2 44 Sustain Sample Depth F5.3 — 44 Keyoff Sample Volume F5.4 — 44 Metronome volume — F6 F5 45 Preset Song Part Cancel Volume — F7 F6 45 MIDI Functions MIDI Transmit Channel Selection F8.1 F7.1 45 MIDI Receive Channel Selection F8.2 F7.2 46 Local Control ON/OFF F8.3 F7.3 46 Program Change ON/OFF F8.4 F7.4 46 Control Change ON/OFF F8.5 F7.5 46 MIDI Transmit Transpose F8.6 F7.6 47 Panel/Status Transmit F8.7 F7.7 47 Bulk Data Dump F8.8 F7.8 47 Voice F9.1 F8.1 48 MIDI F9.2 F8.2 48 Tuning F9.3 F8.3 48 Others F9.4 F8.4 48 Backup Functions CLP-130/120 Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION] ENGLISH Parameter List 37 Basic Procedure in Function Mode Follow the steps below to use the functions. (If you become lost while using a function, return to this page and read the basic procedure.) 1 5 MIN MAX MELLOW START/ STOP BRIGHT BRILLIANCE 3 4 GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE VARIATION GUITAR WOOD BASS E.BASS SPLIT TEMPO/ OTHER VALUE MASTER VOLUME ENGLISH 2 4 DEMO METRONOME TEMPO FUNCTION – /NO +/ YES PRESET USER 1 USER 2 USER 3 TEMPO / FUNCTION TRACK 1 TRACK 2 START/ STOP REC STRINGS CHOIR SONG VOICE ROOM HALL 1 HALL 2 STAGE REVERB CHORUS PHASER TREMOLO DELAY EFFECT HARD MEDIUM SOFT TOUCH ON TRANSPOSE Procedure 1. Engage Function mode. Press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION#] button so that its [FUNCTION#] indicator lights. will appear on the display. (The indication of “ the status of the unit and usage.) ” varies depending on 2. Select a function. Use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION# ▼, ▲] buttons to select the desired function from F1–F9 (CLP-130) / F1–F8 (CLP-120). TEMPO FUNCTION NOTE Functions cannot be selected during Demo/Preset Song mode or when the user song recorder is in operation. NOTE To cancel the function in Step 2, 3, or 4, press the [TEMPO/ FUNCTION# ▼, ▲] button any time to exit Function mode. TEMPO / FUNCTION 3. Use the [–/NO] [+/YES] buttons. If the function does not include sub-modes, start setting the parameters. If the function includes sub-modes, press the [+/YES] button once to enter the respective sub-mode. 4. Operate the desired function using the following two buttons. 1 [TEMPO/FUNCTION# ▼, ▲] Selects the desired function/sub-mode. 2 [–/NO] or [+/YES] After you select the desired function or sub-mode, set the ON/OFF, select the type, or change the value, accordingly. Depending on the setting, the default setting (which is used when you first turn on the power to the Clavinova) is recalled by pressing the [–/ NO] and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously. 38 CLP-130/120 Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION] TIP After you select the function, the current setting will be displayed when the [–/NO] or [+/YES] button is pressed for the first time. Operation Example 1 (F1. Fine tuning of the pitch) TEMPO FUNCTION LCD indication TEMPO FUNCTION TEMPO / FUNCTION Engage Function mode. – /NO TEMPO / FUNCTION Select a desired function. LCD indication +/ YES Change the value. TEMPO FUNCTION TEMPO FUNCTION TEMPO / FUNCTION TEMPO / FUNCTION Engage function mode. Select a desired function. LCD indication TEMPO FUNCTION +/ YES LCD indication ENGLISH Operation Example 2 (F3.1 “Dual Balance”) TEMPO / FUNCTION Engage the respective sub-mode. – /NO +/ YES Select a desired sub-mode. LCD indication Change the value. 5. Do the following when you finish using the function. To exit Function mode, press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION#] button so that its [TEMPO] indicator lights. CLP-130/120 Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION] 39 About Each Function TIP F1. Fine Tuning of the Pitch You can fine tune the pitch of the entire instrument. This function is useful when you play the Clavinova along with other instruments or CD music. ENGLISH 1. Engage Function mode and select . 2. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to lower or raise the pitch of the A3 key in approximately 0.2 Hz increments. ..... ..... Tenths of a hertz are indicated on the LED display by the appearance and position of one or two dots, as in the following example: Display Value 440.0 Setting range: 440.2 427.0–453.0 (Hz) 440.4 Normal setting: 440.6 440.0 (Hz) 440.8 TERMINOLOGY Hz (Hertz): This unit of measurement refers to the frequency of a sound and represents the number of times a sound wave vibrates in a second. TIP You can also use the keyboard to set the pitch (in any mode other than Function mode). To tune up (in about 0.2Hz steps): Hold the A-1 and B-1 keys (two white keys at the left end) simultaneously and press any key between C3 and B3. To tune down (in about 0.2Hz steps): Hold the A-1 and A1 keys (a white and a black key at the left end) simultaneously and press any key between C3 and B3. To restore standard pitch: Hold the A-1, A -1 and B-1 (two white keys and one black key at the left end) simultaneously and press any key between C3 and B3. • Refer to “Part Names” on page 14 for information on the key and key name assignment. (During the procedure described above, the display indicates a value in Hz < … >. After the procedure, the display returns to the previous indication.) 40 CLP-130/120 Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION] You can also tune in about 1Hz steps (in any mode other than Function mode). To tune down or up, respectively, in approximately 1 Hz increments: Hold the A-1 and A-1 keys (a white and a black key at the left end) or A-1 and B-1 keys (two white keys at the left end) simultaneously and press the [–/NO] or [+/YES] button. To restore standard pitch: Hold the A-1 and A-1 keys (a white and a black key at the left end) or A-1 and B-1 keys (two white keys at the left end) simultaneously and press the [–/NO] [+/YES] buttons simultaneously. (During the procedure described above, the display indicates a value in Hz < … >. After the procedure, the display returns to the previous indication.) 1. Engage Function mode and select 2. Press the [+/YES] button to engage the scale function’s sub-mode, then use the [TEMPO/ FUNCTION# ▼, ▲] buttons to select the desired sub-mode. Press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to select the number of the desired tuning. You can select various scales. Equal Temperament is the most common contemporary piano tuning scale. However, history has known numerous other scales, many of which serve as the basis for certain genres of music. You can experience these tunings with the Clavinova. Sub-mode Equal F2.1: Scale One octave is divided into twelve equal intervals. Currently the most popular piano tuning scale. Setting range: PureMajor/PureMinor Based on natural overtones, three major chords using these scales produce a beautiful, pure sound. They are sometimes used for chorus parts. Pythagorean This scale, designed by Pythagoras, a Greek philosopher, is based on the interval of a perfect 5th. The 3rd produces swells, but the 4th and 5th are beautiful and suitable for some leads. MeanTone This scale is an improvement of the Pythagorean in that the swell of the 3rd has been eliminated. The scale became popular during the late 16th century through the late 18th century, and was used by Handel. WerckMeister/KirnBerger These scales combine Mean Tone and Pythagorean in different ways. With these scales, modulation changes the impression and feel of the songs. They were often used in the era of Bach and Beethoven. They are often used today to reproduce the music of that era on harpsichords. . 1: Equal Temperament 2: Pure Major 3: Pure Minor 4: Pythagorean 5: Mean Tone 6: Werckmeister 7: Kirnberger ENGLISH F2. Selecting a Scale Normal setting: 1: Equal Temperament F2.2: Base Note If you select a scale other than Equal Temperament, you need to specify the root. (You can specify the root note with Equal Temperament selected, but it is not effective. The base note setting is effective for tunings other than the Equal Temperament tuning.) Setting range: Normal setting: • Root indication example (F) (G) followed by a high bar if sharp (A ) followed by a low bar if flat CLP-130/120 Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION] 41 F3. Dual Mode Functions You can set various parameters for Dual mode to optimize the settings for the songs you play, such as adjusting the volume balance between two voices. Dual mode function settings are set individually for each voice combination. ENGLISH 1. Select the voices in Dual mode and engage Function mode and select . 2. Press the [+/YES] button to engage the Dual mode function’s sub-mode, then use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION# ▼, ▲] buttons to select the desired sub-mode. Press the [–/NO] [+/ YES] button to assign values. NOTE If Dual mode is not engaged, will appear instead of and you will be unable to select Dual mode functions. You can switch from Function mode to Dual mode. Sub-mode F3.3: Voice 1 Octave Shift F3.4: Voice 2 Octave Shift Setting range: –1, 0, 1 Normal setting: Different for each voice combination. You can shift the pitch up and down in octave steps for Voice 1 and Voice 2 independently. Depending on which voices you combine in Dual mode, the combination may sound better if one of the voices is shifted up or down an octave. F3.5: Voice 1 Effect Depth F3.6: Voice 2 Effect Depth Setting range: 0 – 20 Normal setting: Different for each voice combination. These functions make it possible to individually set the depth of the effect for Voices 1 and 2 for Dual mode. (The effect depth settings cannot be changed unless the [EFFECT] is ON. Function mode must be exited before the [EFFECT] can be turned ON.) • “Voice 1” and “Voice 2” are explained on page 26. F3.1: Dual Balance Setting range: 0 – 20 (A setting of “10” produces an equal balance between the two Dual mode voices. Settings below “10” increase the volume of Voice 2 in relation to Voice 1, and settings above “10” increase the volume of Voice 1 in relation to Voice 2.) Normal setting: Different for each voice combination. You can set one voice as the main voice, and another voice as a softer, mixed voice. F3.2: Dual Detune Setting range: -10 – 0 – 10 (With positive values, the pitch of Voice 1 is raised and the pitch of Voice 2 is lowered. With negative values, the pitch of Voice 1 is lowered and the pitch of Voice 2 is raised.) TIP The available setting range is wider in the lower range (± 60 cents for A-1), and narrower in the higher range (± 5 cents for C7). (100 cents equal one semitone.) Normal setting: Different for each voice combination. Detune Voice 1 and Voice 2 for Dual mode to create a thicker sound. 42 CLP-130/120 Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION] F3.7: Reset This function resets all Dual mode functions to their default values. Press the [+/YES] button to reset the values. TIP SHORTCUT: You can jump directly to the Dual mode functions by pressing the [TEMPO/FUNCTION#] button while holding the two Dual mode voice buttons. To exit Function mode, you still need to press the [TEMPO/ FUNCTION#] button so that the TEMPO indicator lights up. This menu enables you to make various detailed settings for Split mode. By changing the split point or other setting, you can optimize the settings for the songs you play. You can make these settings for each combination of voices individually. 1. Select the voices in Split mode and engage Function mode and select . 2. Press the [+/YES] button to engage the Split mode function’s sub-mode, then use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION# ▼, ▲] buttons to select the desired sub-mode. Press the [–/NO] [+/ YES] button to assign values. NOTE If Split mode is not engaged, will appear instead of and you will be unable to select Split mode functions. Also note that you must exit Function mode before you can engage Split mode. The volume level of the two voices combined in Split mode can be adjusted as required. F4.3: Right Voice Octave Shift F4.4: Left Voice Octave Shift Setting range: –1, 0, 1 Normal setting: Different for each voice combination You can shift the pitch up and down in octave steps for the Right Voice and Left Voice independently. Make a setting depending on the note range of the songs you play. F4.5: Right Voice Effect Depth F4.6: Left Voice Effect Depth Setting range: 0 – 20 Normal setting: Different for each voice combination These functions make it possible to individually set the depth of the effect for the left and right Split mode voices. The effect depth settings cannot be changed unless the [EFFECT] is ON. You must exit Function mode before you can turn on an [EFFECT]. ENGLISH F4. (CLP-130) Split Mode Functions F4.7: Damper Pedal Range Sub-mode Setting range: F4.1: Split Point Setting range: The entire keyboard Normal setting: F 2 Set the point on the keyboard that separates the right and left-hand sections (split point). The pressed key is included in the left-hand range. • Instead of pressing the [–/NO] [+/YES] buttons, you can engage the split point by pressing the appropriate key on the keyboard. • If Function mode is not engaged, you can change the split point to any other key by pressing the key while holding the [SPLIT] button (page 27). • An example of a key name indication for a split point (F2) (G2) followed by a high bar if sharp (A 2) followed by a low bar if flat ALL (for both voices) 1 (for the right Voice) 2 (for the left Voice) Normal setting: ALL The Damper Pedal Range function determines whether the damper pedal affects the right voice, the left voice, or both the left and right voices in Split mode. F4.8: Reset This function resets all Split mode functions to their default values. Press the [+/YES] button to reset the values. TIP SHORTCUT: You can jump directly to Split mode functions by pressing the [TEMPO/FUNCTION#] button while holding the [SPLIT] button. To exit Function mode, you still need to press the [TEMPO/ FUNCTION#] button so that the TEMPO indicator lights up. F4.2: Split Balance Setting range: 0 – 20 (A setting of “10” produces an equal balance between the two Split mode voices. Settings below “10” increase the volume of the left voice in relation to the right voice, and settings above “10” increase the volume of the right voice in relation to the left voice.) Normal setting: Different for each voice combination. CLP-130/120 Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION] 43 F5.4 F5. (CLP-130) / F4. (CLP-120) Other Functions This function conveniently lets you set operation of the left pedal to one of the modes listed below. ENGLISH 1. Engage Function mode and select 130)/ (CLP-120). (CLP- 2. Press the [+/YES] button to engage the other functions’ sub-mode, then use the [TEMPO/ FUNCTION# ▼, ▲] buttons to select the desired sub-mode. Press the [–/NO] or [+/YES] button to select the desired pedal function or assign the values. Sub-mode F5.1 (CLP-130)/F4.1 Left Pedal Mode (CLP-120) Setting range: 1. Soft Pedal The soft pedal reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes played while the pedal is pressed. The soft pedal will not affect notes that are already playing. 2. Song Start/Stop This mode allows you to start or stop song playback. In this mode, the Left Pedal functions in the same manner as the SONG [START/STOP] button on the panel. 3. Variation (CLP-130) This mode enables you to switch the Voice’s variation on or off. In this mode, the left pedal functions in the same manner as the [VARIATION] button on the panel. Normal setting: 1(Soft Pedal) F5.2 (CLP-130)/F4.2 (CLP-120) Soft Pedal Effect Depth Setting range: 1 – 15 Normal setting: 3 This function sets the depth of the soft pedal effect. F5.3 (CLP-130) Sustain Sample Depth Setting range: 0 – 20 Normal setting: 12 The GRAND PIANO 1 voice features special “Sustain Samples” that recreate the unique resonance of an acoustic grand piano’s soundboard and strings when the damper pedal is pressed. This function lets you adjust the depth of this effect. 44 CLP-130/120 Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION] (CLP-130) Keyoff Sample Volume Setting range: 0 – 20 Normal setting: 10 You can adjust the volume of the keyoff sound (the subtle sound produced when the keys are released) for voices [GRAND PIANO1], [HARPSICHORD], [E.CLAVICHORD] (including their variations). F8. (CLP-130) / F7. (CLP-120) MIDI Functions You can change the volume of the metronome sound. Use this function to adjust the metronome volume. 1. Engage Function mode and select 130)/ (CLP-120). (CLP- 2. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to set the metronome volume as required. Setting range: 1 – 20 Normal setting: 10 TIP SHORTCUT: You can jump directly to the metronome functions (CLP-130)/ (CLP-120) by pressing the [TEMPO/FUNCTION#] button while holding the METRONOME [START/ STOP] button. To exit Function mode, you still need to press the [TEMPO/ FUNCTION#] button so that the TEMPO indicator lights up. F7. (CLP-130) / F6. (CLP-120) Preset Song Part Cancel Volume This function sets the volume at which a “canceled” part is played during preset song playback. Adjust the part volume to a comfortable level and use the “canceled” part as a guide with which to play along. 1. Engage Function mode and select 130)/ (CLP-120). (CLP- 2. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to set the volume as required. Setting range: 0 – 20 Normal setting: 5 You can make detailed adjustments to MIDI settings. For more information about MIDI, see the “About MIDI” section (page 49). TIP The HOST SELECT switch on the bottom surface must be set to “MIDI” to enable the MIDI connectors. When you use the TO HOST connector, set the HOST SELECT switch to the appropriate position for the type of computer you are using (pages 49–55). In this situation, all MIDI settings described below will affect the MIDI signal in and out of the TO HOST connector. 1. Engage Function mode and select 130)/ (CLP-120). (CLP- ENGLISH F.6 (CLP-130) / F.5 (CLP-120) Metronome Volume 2. Press the [+/YES] button to engage the MIDI function’s sub-mode, then use the [TEMPO/ FUNCTION# ▼, ▲] buttons to select the desired sub-mode. Press the [–/NO] or [+/YES] button to set a selected parameter. Sub-mode F8.1: (CLP-130)/F7.1: (CLP-120) MIDI Transmit Channel Selection In any MIDI control setup, the MIDI channels of the transmitting and receiving equipment must be matched for proper data transfer. This parameter enables you to specify the channel on which the Clavinova transmits MIDI data. Setting range: 1 – 16, OFF (not transmitted) Normal setting: 1 NOTE In Dual mode, Voice 1 data is transmitted on its specified channel. In Split mode (CLP-130), right voice data is transmitted on its specified channel. In Dual mode, Voice 2 data is transmitted on the next greater channel number relative to the specified channel. In Split mode (CLP-130), left voice data is transmitted on the next greater channel number relative to the specified channel. In either mode, no data is transmitted if the transmit channel is set to “OFF”. NOTE Demo/preset song data and recorder playback data are not transmitted via MIDI. CLP-130/120 Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION] 45 F8.2: (CLP-130)/F7.2: (CLP-120) MIDI Receive Channel Selection F8.4: (CLP-130)/F7.4: (CLP-120) Program Change ON/OFF In any MIDI control setup, the MIDI channels of the transmitting and receiving equipment must be matched for proper data transfer. This parameter enables you to specify the channel on which the Clavinova receives MIDI data. Setting range: ALL, 1&2, 1 – 16 Normal setting: ALL Normally the CLP-130/120 will respond to MIDI program change numbers received from an external keyboard or other MIDI device, causing the correspondingly-numbered voice to be selected on the corresponding channel (the keyboard voice does not change). The CLP-130/120 will normally also send a MIDI program change number whenever one of its voices is selected, causing the correspondingly-numbered voice or program to be selected on the external MIDI device if the device is set up to receive and respond to MIDI program change numbers. This function makes it possible to cancel program change number reception and transmission so that voices can be selected on the CLP-130/120 without affecting the external MIDI device. ENGLISH TIP ALL: A “Multi-timbre” Receive mode is available. It allows simultaneous reception of different parts on all 16 MIDI channels, enabling the Clavinova to play multi-channel song data received from a music computer or sequencer. 1&2: A “1&2” Receive mode is available. It allows simultaneous reception on channels 1 and 2 only, enabling the Clavinova to play 1 and 2 channel song data received from a music computer or sequencer. TIP Program change and other like channel messages received will not affect the CLP-130/120’s panel settings or the notes you play on the keyboard. NOTE No MIDI reception occurs when Demo/Preset Song mode is engaged. F8.3: (CLP-130)/F7.3: (CLP-120) Local Control ON/OFF “Local Control” refers to the fact that, normally, the CLP-130/120 keyboard controls its internal tone generator, allowing the internal voices to be played directly from the keyboard. This situation is “Local Control On,” since the internal tone generator is controlled locally by its own keyboard. Local control can be turned OFF, however, so that the CLP-130/120 keyboard does not play the internal voices, but the appropriate MIDI information is still transmitted via the MIDI OUT connector when notes are played on the keyboard. At the same time, the internal tone generator responds to MIDI information received via the MIDI IN connector. Setting range: ON/OFF Normal setting: ON 46 CLP-130/120 Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION] TIP For information on program change numbers for each of the CLP-130/120’s voices, refer to page 71 in the MIDI Data Format section. Setting range: ON/OFF Normal setting: ON F8.5: (CLP-130)/F7.5: (CLP-120) Control Change ON/OFF Normally the CLP-130/120 will respond to MIDI control change data received from an external MIDI device or keyboard, causing the voice on the corresponding channel to be affected by pedal and other “control” settings received from the controlling device (the keyboard voice is not affected). The CLP-130/120 also transmits MIDI control change information when the pedal or other appropriate controls are operated. This function makes it possible to cancel control change data reception and transmission so that, for example, the CLP-130/120’s pedal and other controls can be operated without affecting an external MIDI device. TIP For information on control changes that can be used with the CLP-130/120, refer to the MIDI Data Format on page 71. Setting range: ON/OFF Normal setting: ON F8.6: (CLP-130)/F7.6: (CLP-120) MIDI Transmit Transpose F8.8: (CLP-130)/F7.8: (CLP-120) Bulk Data Dump This function allows the MIDI note data transmitted by the CLP-130/120 to be transposed up or down in semitone increments by up to plus or minus 12 semitones. The pitch of the CLP-130/120 itself is not affected. Setting range: -12 – 0 – 12 (in semitones) Normal setting: 0 You can save current song data on the Clavinova as MIDI bulk data by transferring it to a connected MIDI data filer (such as an MDF3) or a sequencer. To play back the saved song data, send the bulk data back from the storage device to the Clavinova and follow the usual playback procedure. F8.7: (CLP-130)/F7.7: (CLP-120) Panel/Status Transmit TERMINOLOGY Procedure 1. Record your performance on the Clavinova. 2. Connect the Clavinova to MDF3, a MIDI data filer via MIDI, and set up the MDF3 so it will receive bulk data. 3. Engage Function mode and select ENGLISH This function causes all the current CLP-130/120 panel settings (selected voice, etc.) to be transmitted via the MIDI OUT terminal. This is particularly useful if you will be recording performances to a MIDI sequence recorder, such as the Yamaha MIDI Data Filer MDF3, which will be used to control the CLP-130/120 on playback. By transmitting the CLP-130/120 panel settings and recording them on the MIDI sequence recorder prior to the actual performance data, the CLP-130/120 will be automatically restored to the same settings when the performance is played back. bulk data: A complete set or extended sequence of data (CLP-130)/ (CLP-120). 4. Press the [+/YES] button to begin bulk transmission. will appear on the LED display when the data has been successfully transmitted. TERMINOLOGY Setup Data: Data that contains a set of panel settings for the Clavinova. NOTE No MIDI note/panel data transmission or data reception occurs during a bulk data dump transmit operation. Procedure 1. Set up the panel controls as desired. 2. Connect the Clavinova to a sequencer via MIDI, and set up the sequencer so it can receive the setup data. 3. Engage Function mode and select (CLP-130)/ (CLP-120). 4. Press the [+/YES] button to transmit the panel/status data. will appear on the LED display when the data has been successfully transmitted. TIP Receiving (returning) the transmitted data: 1. Connect the CLP-130/120 via MIDI to the device to which the data was previously transmitted. 2. Start sending the data from the device. The CLP-130/120 automatically receives the data from the unit. (At this time, any data previously stored in the Clavinova will be erased.) Then, follow the usual playback procedure. (For the data to be accepted, the Clavinova that receives the data should be the same model as the one from which the data was once transmitted to the MIDI data filer.) TIP NOTE See page 72 for a list of the “Panel Data Contents” transmitted by this function. The reload operation cannot be executed when Demo/Preset Song mode or the user song recorder is in operation, or when Function mode is engaged. TIP Receiving the transmitted data: 1. Connect the Clavinova via MIDI to the device to which the setup data was transmitted previously. 2. Start sending the setup data from the device. The Clavinova automatically receives the setup data, which will be reflected in the panel settings. (For the data to be accepted, the Clavinova that receives the setup data should be the same model as the one that transmitted the setup data to the sequencer.) TIP For more information on transmitting and receiving bulk data via MIDI, refer to the owner’s manual for the connected MIDI device. TIP For more information on transmitting and receiving setup data via MIDI, refer to the owner’s manual for the connected MIDI device. CLP-130/120 Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION] 47 Description of sub-modes F9. (CLP-130) / F8. (CLP-120) Backup Functions F9.1: (CLP-130)/F8.1: (CLP-120) Voice TERMINOLOGY ENGLISH Backup: You can back up some settings, such as voice selection and reverb type, so that they will not be lost when you turn off the power to the Clavinova. If the backup function is turned on, the settings at power off are effective. If the backup function is turned off, the settings in memory are erased when you turn off the power. In this case, when you turn on the power to the unit, the default settings (the initial settings) will be used. (The factory setting default list is found on page 70.) However, the backup settings themselves, and the contents of the user song recorder memory, are always backed up. CAUTION Even if the backup function is turned on via one of the functions described below, the data will be retained in memory for only about one week if the power is not turned on during this time. If the backup period is exceeded, all settings will be reset to their default values. If you want to retain the backup settings for longer periods, be sure to turn the power on for a few minutes at least once a week. F9.2: (CLP-130)/F8.2: (CLP-120) MIDI The MIDI functions ( 120> settings) <CLP-130>/ (expect for the <CLP-120>) <CLP-130>/ • Transpose • Tuning ( settings) • Scale (including base note) ( F9.4: (CLP-130)/F8.4: 1. Engage Function mode and select 130)/ (CLP-120). Factory Preset Recall (CLP- Sub-mode F9.1: (CLP-130)/F8.1: (CLP-120) Voice F9.2: (CLP-130)/F8.2: (CLP-120) MIDI F9.3: (CLP-130)/F8.3: (CLP-120) Tuning F9.4: (CLP-130)/F8.4: (CLP-120) Others Setting range: ON/OFF Normal setting: OFF (all groups) CLP-130/120 Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION] <CLP- F9.3: (CLP-130)/F8.3: (CLP-120) Tuning You can turn the backup function on or off for each function group (each of the following sub-mode functions). 2. Press the [+/YES] button to engage the backup function’s sub-mode, then use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION# ▼, ▲] buttons to select the desired sub-mode. Press the [–/NO] or [+/YES] button to turn the backup function on or off. 48 • Voice (Keyboard, Dual, and Split <CLP-130>) • Dual (ON/OFF, Voice, and Dual Functions for each voice combination) • Split (CLP-130) (ON/OFF, Voice, and Split Functions for each voice combination) • Reverb (ON/OFF, Type, and Depth for each voice) • Effect (ON/OFF, Type, and Depth for each voice) • Variation (CLP-130) (for each voice) • Touch Sensitivity (including the FIXED volume) • Metronome (Beat, Volume < (CLP-130)/ (CLP-120) settings>) • Preset Song Part Cancel Volume ( <CLP-130>/ <CLP-120> settings) Other functions ( settings) (CLP-120) settings) Others <CLP-130>/ <CLP-120> All Dual mode, Split mode, reverb, effect, touch sensitivity, tuning settings, and the settings affected by the Backup Functions can be restored to their original factory preset values by holding the C7 key (right-most key on the keyboard) while turning the [POWER] button ON. This also erases all user song recorder data, and sets all backup on/off settings (F9) to “OFF”. (The factory setting list is found on page 70.) About MIDI Using MIDI, you can control a connected MIDI device from the Clavinova, or control the Clavinova from a connected MIDI device or computer. MIDI connectors MIDI Mac PC-1 MIDI PC-2 TIP MIDI performance data and commands are transferred in the form of numeric values. TIP Since MIDI data that can be transmitted or received varies depending on the type of MIDI device, check the “MIDI Implementation Chart” to find out what MIDI data and commands your devices can transmit or receive. The Clavinova’s MIDI Implementation Chart appears on page 75. ENGLISH MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a standard format for data transmission/reception. It enables the transfer of performance data and commands between MIDI devices and personal computers. HOST SELECT THRU OUT IN (CLP-130) MIDI [IN]: Receives MIDI data. MIDI [OUT]: Transmits MIDI data. MIDI [THRU]: Transmits data received at the MIDI [IN] connector as it is. MIDI cables NOTE When you are using the MIDI connectors, set the [HOST SELECT] switch to “MIDI” (page 54). Prepare dedicated MIDI cables. [TO HOST] connector Use this connector to connect the Clavinova to a computer. NOTE Mac PC-1 TO HOST MIDI PC-2 HOST SELECT When you are using the [TO HOST] connector, set the [HOST SELECT] switch, according to the type of computer you are using (page 54). TIP You can also obtain detailed information about MIDI from various music books and other publications. CLP-130/120 About MIDI 49 Connections Connectors CAUTION Before connecting the Clavinova to other electronic components, turn off the power to all the components. Before turning the power on or off to all components, set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, electrical shock or damage to the components may result. PEDAL 6 ENGLISH CLP-130 MIDI Mac PC-1 TO HOST MIDI PC-2 R L LEVEL FIXED HOST SELECT THRU 3 OUT 4 R L/L+R R AUX OUT IN 1 5 L/L+R AUX IN 2 CLP-120 MIDI LEVEL FIXED THRU Mac PC-1 R L R L/L+R R OUT IN MIDI PC-2 L/L+R AUX OUT AUX IN TO HOST HOST SELECT 1 2 3 4 PEDAL 5 6 1 AUX OUT [R] [L] Pin jacks (LEVEL FIXED), [R] [L/L+R] Phone jacks You can connect these jacks to a stereo system to amplify the Clavinova or to a cassette tape recorder to record your performance. Refer to the diagram below and use audio cables to make the connections. NOTE Use audio cables and adaptor plugs with no resistance. CAUTION Do not route the output from the AUX OUT jacks to the AUX IN jacks. That is, when you connect an external audio device to the AUX OUT jacks, do not connect the audio device to the Clavinova’s AUX IN jacks. If you make this connection, the signal input at the AUX IN jacks will be output from AUX OUT. This creates an audio loop, causing audio oscillation and abnormal playback, and leading to malfunction of both pieces of equipment. CAUTION When the Clavinova’s AUX OUT jacks are connected to an external audio system, first turn on the power to the Clavinova, then to the external audio system. Reverse this order when you turn the power off. Clavinova Stereo R L LEVEL FIXED R L/L+R AUX OUT AUX IN RCA pin plug RCA pin plug audio cable When these are connected (with RCA pin plug; LEVEL FIXED), the sound is output to the external device at a fixed level, regardless of the [MASTER VOLUME] control setting. 50 CLP-130/120 Connections phone plug (standard) To powered speakers When these are connected (with standard phone plugs), you can use the [MASTER VOLUME] control to adjust the volume of the sound output to the external device. NOTE The Clavinova’s [MASTER VOLUME] and [BRILLIANCE] slider setting does not affect the signal output from the AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) jacks. 2 AUX IN [R], [L/L+R] jacks The stereo outputs from another instrument can be connected to these jacks, allowing the sound of an external instrument to be reproduced via the Clavinova’s speakers. Refer to the diagram below and use audio cables to make the connections. CAUTION When the Clavinova’s AUX IN jacks are connected to an external device, first turn on the power to the external device, then to the Clavinova. Reverse this order when you turn the power off. Clavinova R phone plug (standard) L/L+R NOTE The Clavinova’s [MASTER VOLUME] and [BRILLIANCE] slider settings affect the input signal from the AUX IN jacks, but the [REVERB] and [EFFECT] settings do not. NOTE If you connect the Clavinova to a monaural device, use only the AUX IN [L/L+R] jack or AUX OUT [L/L+R] jack. ENGLISH AUX IN AUX OUT AUX IN phone plug (standard) audio cable Tone Generator 3 TO HOST jack This jack allows direct connection to a personal computer. (Refer to “Connecting a personal computer” on page 52 for more information.) 4 HOST SELECT switch This switch should be set according to the type of connected MIDI device or personal computer. (Refer to “Connecting a personal computer” on page 52 for more information.) 5 MIDI [IN], [OUT], [THRU] connectors Use MIDI cables to connect external MIDI devices to these connectors. Make sure you set the HOST SELECT switch to MIDI when you use these connectors. (Refer to “About MIDI” on page 49 for more information.) 6 PEDAL jack Connect the pedal cord from the pedal box. (Refer to “Keyboard Stand Assembly” on pages 57-62.) CLP-130/120 Connections 51 CLP130(E).book Page 52 Thursday, October 31, 2002 2:45 PM Connecting a Personal Computer You can enjoy computer music data on the Clavinova by connecting a computer to the TO HOST (or MIDI) jack. ENGLISH NOTE When the Clavinova is used as a tone module, performance data with voices that are not found on the Clavinova will not be played correctly. “The Clavinova-Computer Connection,” is a supplementary guidebook that describes, for beginners, what you can do with your Clavinova and a personal computer and how to set up a Clavinova-Computer system (the manual is not written for any specific models). The document is available as a PDF file (in English) at the following Internet address: Clavinova Web site (English only): http://www.yamahaclavinova.com/ Yamaha Manual Library: http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/ There are three methods by which to connect the Clavinova to a personal computer: 1. Connect the serial port on the computer to the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack (page 53). 2. Use a MIDI interface and the Clavinova’s MIDI connectors (page 54). 3. Use the USB port on the computer and the UX256, UX96, or UX16, a USB interface (page 55). For more information, refer to the specified pages. 52 NOTE When connecting the Clavinova to a personal computer, first turn off the power to both the Clavinova and the computer before you connect any cables or set the HOST SELECT switch. After making the connections and switch settings, turn on the power to the computer first, then to the Clavinova. NOTE If you do not use the [TO HOST] jack of the Clavinova, make sure you disconnect the cable from the jack. If the cable is left connected, the Clavinova may not function properly. NOTE will appear in the display if the host computer is not turned on, the connecting cable is not properly connected, the HOST SELECT switch is not in the proper position, or the MIDI driver or MIDI application is not active. In this situation, turn the power off to both the Clavinova and the computer, and check the cable connection and the position of the HOST SELECT switch. Once the connection and HOST SELECT switch position is verified, turn the power of the computer on first, then the Clavinova, and check whether the MIDI driver and MIDI application function properly. NOTE When the [HOST SELECT] switch is set to “PC-1,” PC-2,” or “Mac,” you can use the [TO HOST] jack, but the MIDI connectors are disabled since no data transfer occurs via the MIDI connectors. On the other hand, when the [HOST SELECT] switch is set to “MIDI,” you can use the MIDI connectors, but not the [TO HOST] jack since no data is transferred via the [TO HOST] jack. CLP-130/120 Connections 1. Connecting the serial port on the computer to the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack Connect the computer’s serial port (RS-232C or RS-422) to the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack. With this connection, the Clavinova functions as a MIDI interface. Therefore, you do not need a special MIDI interface. Connection Use a special serial cable (page 53) to connect the computer’s serial port (RS-232C or RS-422) to the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack. Mac PC-1 TO HOST MIDI PC-2 Note for Windows users (regarding the MIDI driver) To transfer data via the computer’s serial port and the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack, you need to install a specific MIDI driver (the Yamaha CBX driver for Windows). You can download this driver from the following XG Library on the Yamaha web site: http://www.yamaha-xg.com HOST SELECT TO HOST RS-232C (D-sub 9-pin) RS-232C (D-sub 25-pin) modem port Windows Windows Macintosh ENGLISH Clavinova Type of serial cables and connection pin assignments Depending on the type of computer you connect, use one of the following serial cables. Windows (with a serial port of D-sub 9-pin) 8-pin mini DIN plug ➝ D-sub 9-pin plug (Yamaha CCJ-PC2 or equivalent) mini DIN 1 2 8-pin 8 (CTS) 7 (RTS) 2 (RxD) 5 (GND) 3 4 8 5 Macintosh System peripheral plug ➝ 8-pin plug (Yamaha CCJ-MAC or equivalent) D-sub 9-pin mini DIN 1 2 8-pin 3 (TxD) Windows (with a serial port of D-sub 25-pin) 8-pin mini DIN plug ➝ D-sub 25-pin plug (Yamaha CCJ-PC1NF or equivalent) Pin assignment The following diagram shows the pin assignments for each cable. Pin numbers (view from front) mini DIN 8-pin mini DIN 8-pin 1 2 3 4 8 5 5 (CTS) 4 (RTS) 3 (RxD) 7 (GND) 2 (HSK i) mini DIN 1 (HSK O) 8-pin 5 (RxD-) 4 (GND) 3 (TxD-) 8 (RxD+) 7 (GP-) 6 (TxD+) 3 4 5 6 7 8 D-sub 25-pin D-sub 9-pin D-sub 25-pin 2 (TxD) CLP-130/120 Connections 53 Clavinova HOST SELECT switch setting Set the Clavinova HOST SELECT switch properly according to the type of connected computer. • Macintosh: “Mac” (data transfer rate: 31,250bps, 1MHz clock) • Windows: “PC-2” (data transfer rate: 38,400bps) TIP If your system does not work properly with the connections and settings listed above, your software may require different settings. Check your software operation manual and set the HOST SELECT switch to the proper data transfer rate. (Data transfer rate of “PC-1” is 31,250bps.) ENGLISH 2. Using a MIDI interface and the Clavinova’s MIDI connectors Connection Use a MIDI interface device to connect a computer to the Clavinova using special MIDI cables. Clavinova MIDI Mac PC-1 MIDI PC-2 HOST SELECT THRU OUT MIDI OUT (CLP-130) IN MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI IN MIDI interface MIDI interface Windows Clavinova HOST SELECT switch setting Set the Clavinova HOST SELECT switch to “MIDI.” 54 CLP-130/120 Connections Macintosh 3. Connecting the computer’s USB port to the Clavinova via a USB interface, such as the UX256, UX96, or UX16 Connect the computer’s USB port to the USB interface (such as the UX256, UX96, or UX16) using a USB cable. Install the driver (that came with the USB interface) on the computer, and connect the USB interface to the Clavinova using a serial cable or MIDI cables. For more information, refer to the instruction manual for the USB interface. An example of connecting the USB interface to the Clavinova using a serial cable or TO HOST USB cable HOST SELECT Standard Machintosh 8-pin system peripheral cable computer ENGLISH Mac PC-1 Clavinova USB interface MIN MAX START/ STOP BRIGHT DEMO BRILLIANCE GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE VARIATION GUITAR WOOD BASS E.BASS SPLIT TEMPO/ OTHER VALUE MASTER VOLUME MELLOW METRONOME TEMPO FUNCTION — / NO +/ YES PRESET USER 1 USER 2 USER 3 TRACK 1 TRACK 2 START/ STOP REC SONG TEMPO / FUNCTION VOICE ROOM HALL 1 HALL 2 STAGE REVERB CHORUS PHASER TREMOLO DELAY EFFECT HARD MEDIUM SOFT TOUCH ON TRANSPOSE POWER An example of connecting the USB interface to the Clavinova using MIDI cables MIDI MIDI USB cable OUT HOST SELECT IN MIDI cables computer Clavinova USB interface MIN MAX START/ STOP BRIGHT BRILLIANCE GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE VARIATION GUITAR WOOD BASS E.BASS SPLIT TEMPO/ OTHER VALUE MASTER VOLUME MELLOW DEMO METRONOME TEMPO FUNCTION TEMPO / FUNCTION — / NO +/ YES PRESET USER 1 USER 2 USER 3 TRACK 1 SONG TRACK 2 START/ STOP REC VOICE ROOM HALL 1 HALL 2 STAGE REVERB CHORUS PHASER TREMOLO DELAY EFFECT HARD MEDIUM SOFT TOUCH ON TRANSPOSE POWER CLP-130/120 Connections 55 Troubleshooting ENGLISH Problem Possible Cause and Solution The Clavinova does not turn on. The Clavinova has not been plugged in properly. Securely insert the female plug into the socket on the Clavinova, and the male plug into a proper AC outlet (page 11). A click or pop is heard when the power is turned on or off. This is normal when electrical current is being applied to the instrument. Noise is heard from the speakers or headphones. The noise may be due to interference caused by the use of a mobile phone in close proximity to the Clavinova. Turn off the mobile phone, or use it further away from the Clavinova. The overall volume is low, or no sound is heard. • The Master Volume is set too low; set it to an appropriate level using the [MASTER VOLUME] control. • Make sure a pair of headphones is not connected to the headphones jack (when the SPEAKER switch is set to the “NORMAL” position). If the SPEAKER switch is set to the “OFF” position, set it to “NORMAL” or “ON” (page 12). • Make sure that Local Control (page 46) is ON. The speakers do not switch off when a pair of headphones is connected. The SPEAKER switch may be switched “ON.” Set the SPEAKER switch to the “NORMAL” position (page 12). The damper pedal has no effect, or the sound continuously sustains even when the damper pedal is not pressed. The pedal cable/plug may not be properly connected. Make sure to securely insert the pedal plug into the proper jack (pages 57–62). TIP If appears on the display, an internal malfunction has occurred. In this case, contact your Yamaha dealer. Options BC-100 Bench A comfortable bench styled to match your Yamaha Clavinova. HPE-160 Stereo Headphones High-performance lightweight dynamic headphones with extra-soft ear pads. 56 Troubleshooting CLP-130/120 Troubleshooting/Options CLP-120: Keyboard Stand Assembly CAUTION • Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct direction. Please assemble in accordance with the sequence given below. • Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons. • Be sure to use the correct screw size, as indicated below. Use of incorrect screws can cause damage. • Be sure to tighten up all screws upon completing assembly of each unit. • To disassemble, reverse the assembly sequence given below. Remove the following parts from the package. 1. Attach the side panels to the pedal box. Side panel (left) Assembly Parts 6 × 25 mm long screws ×4 1 4 × 20 mm tapping screws ×4 4 6 × 16 mm short screws ×4 2 Side panel (right) Cord holders × 2 (1) Untie and straighten out the bundled cord attached to the bottom of the pedal box. Don’t discard the vinyl tie, you’ll need it later in step 5. 4 × 12 mm thin screws ×2 3 2. Rear panel (2) Secure the top of the rear panel to the side panel brackets using two 4×12 mm thin screws 3. Side panel (right) Pedal box AC power cord Bundled pedal cord inside (2) Use the four 6×25 mm long screws 1 to attach the pedal box. First attach one side panel, then attach the other side panel. Attach the rear panel. Main unit Side panel (left) ENGLISH Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver ready. TIP A headphone hanger is included in the CLP-120 package. You can attach a headphone hanger on the Clavinova to hang the headphones (page 12). (1) Place the bottom edges of the rear panel on the feet’s protruding edges, with the panel slightly angled as shown in the illustration. Then, align the top part of the panel with the side panels. (3) Secure the bottom of the rear panel to the pedal box using four 4×20 mm tapping screws 4. CLP-130/120 CLP-120: Keyboard Stand Assembly 57 3. Mount the main unit. 5. CAUTION Connect the pedal cord. (1) Insert the pedal cord plug to the pedal connector from the front. PEDA L • Fingers can become pinched between the main unit and the rear or side panels, be extra careful so as not to drop the main unit. • Do not hold the keyboard in any position other than the position shown in the illustration. (3) Use a vinyl tie to take up any slack in the pedal cord. ENGLISH Be sure to place your hands at least 10 cm from either end of the main unit when positioning it. (2) Attach the cord holders to the rear panel as shown, then clip the cord into the holders. R At least 10 cm 4. 6. Fix the main unit. Set the voltage selector and connect the power cord. (1) Center the main unit to produce equal clearance on the left and right sides. MIDIPC-1 PC-2 Mac 110 127 220 (2) Use 6x16 mm short screws 2 to secure the main unit from the front. 240 Voltage Selector Before connecting the AC power cord, check the setting of the voltage selector which is provided in some areas. To set the selector for 110V, 127V, 220V or 240V main voltages, use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage for your region appears next to the pointer on the panel. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. After the proper voltage has been selected, connect the AC power cord to the AC INLET and an AC wall outlet. A plug adaptor may be also provided in some areas to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area. WARNING An improper voltage setting can cause serious damage to the Clavinova or result in improper operation. 58 CLP-130/120 CLP-120: Keyboard Stand Assembly CLP130(E).book Page 59 Thursday, October 31, 2002 2:45 PM 7. Set the adjuster. Rotate the adjuster until it comes in firm contact with the floor surface. After completing the assembly, please check the following. • Are there any parts left over? ENGLISH ➝ Review the assembly procedure and correct any errors. • Is the Clavinova clear of doors and other movable fixtures? ➝ Move the Clavinova to an appropriate location. • Does the Clavinova make a rattling noise when you shake it? ➝ Tighten all screws. • Does the pedal box rattle or give way when you step on the pedals? ➝ Turn the adjuster so that it is set firmly against the floor. • Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely into the sockets? ➝ Check the connection. • If the main unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady when you play on the keyboard, refer to the assembly diagrams and retighten all screws. When moving the instrument after assembly, always hold the bottom of the main unit. CAUTION Do not hold the key cover or top portion. Improper handling can result in damage to the instrument or personal injury. Key cover Top portion CLP-130/120 CLP-120: Keyboard Stand Assembly 59 CLP-130: Keyboard Stand Assembly CAUTION • Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct direction. Please assemble in accordance with the sequence given below. • Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons. • Be sure to use the correct screw size, as indicated below. Use of incorrect screws can cause damage. • Be sure to tighten up all screws upon completing assembly of each unit. • To disassemble, reverse the assembly sequence given below. ENGLISH Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver ready. Remove the following parts from the package. 1. Attach the side panels to the pedal box. Side panel (left) Assembly Parts 6 × 25 mm long screws ×4 1 4 × 20 mm tapping screws ×4 4 6 × 16 mm short screws ×4 2 Side panel (right) Cord holders × 2 (1) Untie and straighten out the bundled cord attached to the bottom of the pedal box. Don’t discard the vinyl tie, you’ll need it later in step 5. 4 × 12 mm thin screws ×2 3 2. Attach the rear panel. (2) Secure the top of the rear panel to the side panel brackets using two 4×12 mm thin screws 3. Main unit Side panel (left) Rear panel Side panel (right) Pedal box AC power cord Bundled pedal cord inside TIP A headphone hanger is included in the CLP-130 package. You can attach a headphone hanger on the Clavinova to hang the headphones (page 12). 60 (2) Use the four 6×25 mm long screws 1 to attach the pedal box. First attach one side panel, then attach the other side panel. CLP-130/120 CLP-130: Keyboard Stand Assembly (1) Place the bottom edges of the rear panel on the feet’s protruding edges, with the panel slightly angled as shown in the illustration. Then, align the top part of the panel with the side panels. (3) Secure the bottom of the rear panel to the pedal box using four 4×20 mm tapping screws 4. Mount the main unit. 5. Connect the pedal cord. (1) Insert the pedal cord plug to the pedal connector from the front. PEDA L 3. CAUTION • Fingers can become pinched between the main unit and the rear or side panels, be extra careful so as not to drop the main unit. • Do not hold the keyboard in any position other than the position shown in the illustration. (2) Attach the cord holders to the rear panel as shown, then clip the cord into the holders. R At least 10 cm ENGLISH (3) Use a vinyl tie to take up any slack in the pedal cord. Be sure to place your hands at least 10 cm from either end of the main unit when positioning it. 6. Fix the main unit. Set the voltage selector and connect the power cord. (1) Center the main unit to produce equal clearance on the left and right sides. 220 110 127 4. (2) Use 6x16 mm short screws 2 to secure the main unit from the front. 240 Voltage Selector Before connecting the AC power cord, check the setting of the voltage selector which is provided in some areas. To set the selector for 110V, 127V, 220V or 240V main voltages, use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage for your region appears next to the pointer on the panel. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. After the proper voltage has been selected, connect the AC power cord to the AC INLET and an AC wall outlet. A plug adaptor may be also provided in some areas to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area. WARNING An improper voltage setting can cause serious damage to the Clavinova or result in improper operation. CLP-130/120 CLP-130: Keyboard Stand Assembly 61 CLP130(E).book Page 62 Thursday, October 31, 2002 2:46 PM 7. Set the adjuster. Rotate the adjuster until it comes in firm contact with the floor surface. After completing the assembly, please check the following. ENGLISH • Are there any parts left over? ➝ Review the assembly procedure and correct any errors. • Is the Clavinova clear of doors and other movable fixtures? ➝ Move the Clavinova to an appropriate location. • Does the Clavinova make a rattling noise when you shake it? ➝ Tighten all screws. • Does the pedal box rattle or give way when you step on the pedals? ➝ Turn the adjuster so that it is set firmly against the floor. • Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely into the sockets? ➝ Check the connection. • If the main unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady when you play on the keyboard, refer to the assembly diagrams and retighten all screws. When moving the instrument after assembly, always hold the bottom of the main unit. CAUTION Do not hold the key cover or top portion. Improper handling can result in damage to the instrument or personal injury. Key cover Top portion 62 CLP-130/120 CLP-130: Keyboard Stand Assembly Preset Voice List CLP-130 GRANDPIANO 1 VARIATION GRANDPIANO 2 VARIATION E.PIANO 1 VARIATION E.PIANO 2 VARIATION HARPSICHORD VARIATION E. CLAVICHORD VARIATION VIBRAPHONE VARIATION CHURCH ORGAN Stereo Sampling Touch Response Dynamic Sampling*1 Key-Off Sampling*2 Voice Descriptions Recorded samples from a full concert grand piano. Also includes three levels of dynamic sampling, sustain samples, and key-off samples for exceptionally realistic acoustic grand piano sound. Perfect for classical compositions as well as any other style that requires acoustic piano. Warm and mellow piano. Good for classical compositions. Spacious and clear piano with bright reverb. Good for popular music. Bright, spacious piano. Good for popular or rock music. An electronic piano sound created by FM synthesis. Extremely “musical” response with varying timbre according to keyboard dynamics. Good for standard popular music. A synth-generated type electronic piano sound often heard in popular music. Used in the DUAL mode it blends well with an acoustic piano voice. The sound of an electric piano using hammer-struck metallic “tines”. Soft tone when played lightly, and an aggressive tone when played hard. A slightly different electric piano sound often heard in rock and popular music. The definitive instrument for baroque music. Since harpsichord uses plucked strings, there is no touch response. There is, however, a characteristic additional sound when the keys are released. Mixes the same voice an octave higher for a more brilliant tone. A hammer-struck keyboard instrument that utilizes an electric pickup that is often heard in funk and soul music. Its tone is noted for the unique sound produced when the keys are released. Includes a unique preset effect. Vibraphone played with relatively soft mallets. The tone becomes more metallic the harder you play. Stereo-sampled, spacious, and realistic marimba. This is a typical pipe organ sound (8 feet + 4 feet + 2 feet). Good for sacred music from the Baroque period. VARIATION This is the organ's full coupler sound often associated with Beach’s “Toccata and Fugue”. JAZZ ORGAN The sound of a “tonewheel” type electric organ. Often heard in jazz and rock idioms. VARIATION Uses a rotary speaker effect with a different speed. The variations speed is faster. If the variation is selected while holding a chord, the speed of the effect will gradually change. STRINGS VARIATION CHOIR VARIATION ENGLISH Voice Name Stereo-sampled, large-scale strings ensemble with realistic reverb. Try combining this voice with piano in the DUAL mode. Spacious strings ensemble with a slow attack. Try combining this voice with a piano or electric piano in the DUAL mode. A big, spacious choir voice. Perfect for creating rich harmonies in slow pieces. A choir voice with a slow attack. Try combining this voice with a piano or electric piano in the DUAL mode. CLP-130/120 Preset Voice List 63 Voice Name Stereo Sampling GUITAR VARIATION WOOD BASS VARIATION E.BASS ENGLISH VARIATION 64 Touch Response Dynamic Sampling*1 Key-Off Sampling*2 Voice Descriptions Warm and natural-sounding nylon guitar. Enjoy the quiet ambience of nylon strings. Bright, brilliant steel guitar. Suitable for popular music. An upright bass played fingerstyle. Ideal for jazz and Latin music. Adds a cymbal voice to the bass sound. Ideal for walking bass lines in jazz tunes. Electric bass for a wide range of music styles, jazz, rock, popular, and more. A fretless bass good for styles such as jazz, fusion, etc. *1. Dynamic Sampling provides multiple velocity-switched samples to accurately simulate the timbral response of an acoustic instrument. *2. Contains a very subtle sample that is produced when the keys are released. CLP-130/120 Preset Voice List CLP-120 Stereo Sampling Touch Response Dynamic Sampling*1 Key-Off Sampling*2 Voice Descriptions GRANDPIANO 1 Recorded samples from a full concert grand piano. Perfect for classical compositions as well as any other style that requires acoustic piano. GRANDPIANO 2 Spacious and clear piano with bright reverb. Good for popular music. E.PIANO 1 An electronic piano sound created by FM synthesis. Good for standard popular music. E.PIANO 2 The sound of an electric piano using hammer-struck metallic “tines”. Soft tone when played lightly, and an aggressive tone when played hard. HARPSICHORD 1 The definitive instrument for baroque music. Since harpsichord uses plucked strings, there is no touch response. There is, however, a characteristic additional sound when the keys are released. HARPSICHORD 2 Mixes the same voice an octave higher for a more brilliant tone. VIBRAPHONE Vibraphone played with relatively soft mallets. The tone becomes more metallic the harder you play. CHURCH ORGAN 1 This is a typical pipe organ sound (8 feet + 4 feet + 2 feet). Good for sacred music from the Baroque period. CHURCH ORGAN 2 This is the organ's full coupler sound often associated with Beach’s “Toccata and Fugue”. JAZZ ORGAN The sound of a “tonewheel” type electric organ. Often heard in jazz and rock idioms. STRINGS 1 Stereo-sampled, large-scale strings ensemble with realistic reverb. Try combining this voice with piano in the DUAL mode. STRINGS 2 Spacious strings ensemble with a slow attack. Try combining this voice with a piano or electric piano in the DUAL mode. CHOIR A big, spacious choir voice. Perfect for creating rich harmonies in slow pieces. GUITAR Warm and natural-sounding nylon guitar. Enjoy the quiet ambience of nylon strings. ENGLISH Voice Name *1. Dynamic Sampling provides multiple velocity-switched samples to accurately simulate the timbral response of an acoustic instrument. *2. Contains a very subtle sample that is produced when the keys are released. CLP-130/120 Preset Voice List 65 Demo Song List Voice Name CLP-130 CLP-120 GRAND PIANO1 Title Consolation No.3 Composer F. Liszt HARPSICHORD Gavotte HARPSICHORD1 J.S. Bach HARPSICHORD2 Invention No.1 ENGLISH The demonstration pieces listed above are short rearranged excerpts the original compositions. All other songs are original (©2002 Yamaha Corporation). Piano Voice Demo Description (CLP-130) Voice Name 66 Piano Voice Demo GRAND PIANO1 Stereo sampling GRAND PIANO2 Monaural sampling E.PIANO1 Dynamic sampling; mezzo piano E.PIANO2 Dynamic sampling; mezzo forte HARPSICHORD Dynamic sampling; forte E.CLAVICHORD With sustain sampling VIBRAPHONE Without sustain sampling CHURCH ORGAN With key-off sampling JAZZ ORGAN Without key-off sampling CLP-130/120 Demo Song List Index Numerics F 50 Greats for the Piano ...................................................17 Factory Setting List .........................................................70 50 Piano Preset Songs .....................................................17 Fine Tuning of the Pitch.................................................40 FUL (LED display)..........................................................31 A-B Repeat for 50 Preset Songs ......................................20 Accessories .........................................................................8 Adding Variations ...........................................................22 Adjust Brilliance ..............................................................16, 22 Tempo (50 Piano Preset Songs) ...............................17 Tempo (Recorded Songs) .........................................35 Volume (50 Piano Preset Songs) ..............................17 Volume (Demo) ........................................................16 Volume (Metronome) ..............................................45 FUNCTION ........................................................14, 40–48 Basic Procedure.........................................................38 Function Parameter List .................................................70 H HOST SELECT.................................................... 15, 51, 54 ENGLISH A HST (LED display)..........................................................52 K Key Cover ........................................................................10 ALL (LED display) ..........................................................17 Assembly ....................................................................57–62 AUX IN ......................................................................14, 51 AUX OUT..................................................................14, 50 L LED display .....................................................................14 Left Pedal ............................................................. 15, 22, 44 B Backup Functions............................................................48 BRILLIANCE.............................................................14, 22 C Center Pedal ..............................................................15, 22 Combining Two Voices (Dual mode)............................26 Connecting a Personal Computer ..................................52 Connections.....................................................................50 Connectors ......................................................................50 D List Demo Song ................................................................66 Factory Setting...........................................................70 Functions ...................................................................37 Preset Voice .........................................................63–65 M MASTER VOLUME.................................................. 11, 14 METRONOME ......................................................... 14, 29 Metronome Volume .......................................................45 MIDI ................................................................................49 MIDI [IN] [OUT] [THRU] ..................................... 15, 51 MIDI cables ......................................................... 49, 54, 55 MIDI connectors....................................................... 49, 54 Damper Pedal ......................................................15, 21, 43 MIDI Data Format..........................................................71 DEMO........................................................................14, 16 MIDI driver .....................................................................53 Demo Song List ...............................................................66 MIDI Functions ..............................................................45 Detailed Settings (FUNCTION).....................................37 Music Rest .......................................................................10 Dual mode .................................................................26, 42 N E Normal setting ................................................................22 EFFECT......................................................................14, 23 CLP-130/120 Index 67 ENGLISH P T PEDAL jack................................................................14, 51 TEMPO................................................................ 14, 17, 35 PHONES....................................................................12, 15 TEMPO (METRONOME) ............................................. 29 Piano Voice Demo Description......................................66 TO HOST .................................................................. 15, 49 Pitch ➝ Fine Tuning of the Pitch...................................40 TOUCH ..................................................................... 14, 24 POWER......................................................................11, 14 Touch Sensitivity............................................................. 24 Practicing a One-Hand Part Using 50 Preset Songs......18 Track Playback On and Off ............................................ 36 Precautions ....................................................................6–7 TRACK1/2 (50 Piano Preset Songs) .............................. 18 PRESET......................................................................14, 17 TRACK1/2 (Recording).................................................. 31 Preset Song Part...............................................................45 Transporting ..................................................................... 8 Preset songs ➝ 50 Piano Preset Songs ...........................17 TRANSPOSE ............................................................. 14, 25 Preset Voice List ........................................................63–65 Troubleshooting.............................................................. 56 Tuning ➝ Fine Tuning of the Pitch............................... 40 R REC ➝ Recording .....................................................14, 31 U Recording.........................................................................30 Initial Settings............................................................34 USB .................................................................................. 55 USER 1/2/3 (CLP-130) ................................................... 30 Re-recording....................................................................32 REVERB.....................................................................14, 22 Right Pedal.................................................................15, 21 rnd (LED display)............................................................17 S Scale..................................................................................41 Scn (LED display)............................................................56 Serial cable .................................................................53, 55 Soft Pedal .............................................................15, 22, 44 Sostenute Pedal..........................................................15, 22 SPEAKER ...................................................................12, 15 Specifications...................................................................76 SPLIT (CLP-130).................................................14, 27, 43 START/STOP (Demo)....................................................16 START/STOP (METRONOME)..............................14, 29 Start/Stop (Pedal)............................................................36 START/STOP (SONG) ...................................................14 Start/Stop playback 50 Piano Preset Songs................................................17 Demonstration Tunes ...............................................16 Recorded Songs .........................................................35 Useful Playback Functions........................................36 Start/Stop recording........................................................31 Sustain Pedal....................................................................44 Synchro Start 50 Piano Preset Songs................................................19 Recorded Songs .........................................................36 68 CLP-130/120 Index V VARIATION (CLP-130) ................................................ 22 VOICE ....................................................................... 14, 21 CLP130(E).book Page 69 Thursday, October 31, 2002 2:46 PM Appendix This section introduces reference material. In diesem Abschnitt finden Sie Referenzmaterial. Cette section présente le matériel de référence. En esta sección se incluye material de referencia. Factory Setting List / Liste der Vorgabeeinstellungen / Liste des réglages / Lista de ajustes de fábrica.............. 70 MIDI Data Format / MIDI-Datenformat / Format des données MIDI / Formato de datos MIDI ................... 71 MIDI Implementation Chart / MIDI Implementierung stabelle / Feuille d’implantation MIDI / Gráfica de implementación MIDI ................................................................... 75 Specifications / Technische Daten / Caractéristiques techniques / Especificaciones .......................................... 76 CLP-130/120 69 Factory Setting List / Liste der Vorgabeeinstellungen / Liste des réglages / Lista de ajustes de fábrica Backup Group Voice CLP-130 CLP-120 F9.1 F8.1 OFF — — 0 (no accent) F9.1 F8.1 120 — — 0 F9.3 F8.3 GRAND PIANO 1 Variation (CLP-130) OFF Dual Mode OFF Split Mode (CLP-130) OFF Split Mode Left Voice (CLP-130) WOOD BASS Reverb Type Preset for each voice Reverb Depth Preset for each voice Effect Type Preset for each voice Effect Depth Preset for each voice Touch Sensitivity MEDIUM Volume in the FIXED Mode 64 Metronome Metronome Time Signature Tempo Transpose Function CLP-130 CLP-120 Default F1 F1 Tuning A3=440Hz F2.1 F2.1 Scale 1 (Equal Temperament) F2.2 F2.2 Base Note C F3.1 F3.1 Dual Balance Preset for each voice combination F3.2 F3.2 Dual Detune Preset for each voice combination F3.3, F3.4 F3.3, F3.4 Dual Octave Shift Preset for each voice combination F3.5, F.3.6 F3.5, F.3.6 Dual Effect Depth Preset for each voice combination F2 F4.1 70 Function — Split Point F4.2 — Split Balance Preset for each voice combination F4.3, F4.4 — Split Octave Shift Preset for each voice combination F4.5, F4.6 — Split Effect Depth Preset for each voice combination F4.7 — Damper Pedal Range ALL F5.1 F4.1 Left Pedal Mode 1 (Soft Pedal) F5.2 F4.2 Soft Pedal Effect Depth 3 F5.3 — Sustain Sample Depth 12 F5.4 — Keyoff Sample Volume 10 F6 F5 Metronome Volume 10 F7 F6 Preset Song Part Cancel Volume 5 F8.1 F7.1 MIDI Transmit Channel 1 F8.2 F7.2 MIDI Receive Channel ALL F8.3 F7.3 Local Control ON F8.4 F7.4 Program Change Send & Receive ON F8.5 F7.5 Control Change Send & Receive ON F8.6 F7.6 MIDI Transmit Transpose 0 F9 F8 Backup All OFF CLP-130/120 Appendix Backup Group CLP-130 CLP-120 F9.3 F8.3 F9.1 F8.1 F9.4 F8.4 F9.1 F8.1 F9.2 F8.2 Always backed up MIDI Data Format / MIDI-Datenformat / Format des données MIDI / Formato de datos MIDI If you’re already very familiar with MIDI, or are using a computer to control your music hardware with computergener-ated MIDI messages, the data provided in this section can help you to control the CLP-130/120. Falls Sie bereits mit MIDI vertraut sind oder einen Computer zur Erzeugung von MIDI-Steuermeldungen für die Instrumente verwenden, können Sie sich zur Steuerung des CLP-130/120 nach den im folgenden Abschnitt aufgeführten Spezifikationen richten. Si vous êtes très familier avec l’interface MIDI ou si vous utilisez un ordinateur pour commander votre matériel de musique au moyen de messages MIDI générés par ordinateur, les données suivantes vous seront utiles et vous aideront à commander le CLP-130/120. SI usted está ya familiarizado con MIDI, o si emplea una computadora para controlar sus aparatos musicales con mensajes MIDI generados por computadora, los datos proporcionados en esta sección le ayudarán a controlar la CLP-130/120. 1. NOTE ON/OFF 3. MODE MESSAGES Data format: [9nH] -> [kk] -> [vv] Data format: [BnH] -> [cc] -> [vv] 9nH = Note ON/OFF event (n = channel number) kk = Note number (Transmit: 09H ~ 78H = A-2 ~ C8 / Receive: 00H ~ 7FH = C-2 ~ G8)* vv = Velocity (Key ON = 01H ~ 7FH, Key OFF = 00H) Data format: [8nH] -> [kk] -> [vv] (reception only) 8nH = Note OFF event (n = channel number) kk = Note number: 00H ~ 7FH = C-2 ~ G8 vv = Velocity * If received value exceeds the supported range for the selected voice, the note is adjusted by the necessary number of octaves. 2. CONTROL CHANGE Data format: [BnH] -> [cc] -> [vv] BnH = Control change (n = channel number) cc = Control number vv = Data Range (1) Bank Select ccH Parameter Data Range (vvH) 00H Bank Select MSB 00H:Normal 20H Bank Select LSB 00H...7FH Bank selection processing does not occur until receipt of next Program Change message. (2) Main Volume (reception only) ccH Parameter Data Range (vvH) 07H Volume MSB 00H...7FH (3) Expression ccH Parameter 0BH Expression MSB Data Range (vvH) 00H...7FH (4) Damper ccH Parameter 40H Damper MSB Data Range (vvH) 00H...7FH (5) Sostenuto ccH Parameter 42H Sostenuto Data Range (vvH) 00H-3FH:off, 40H-7FH:on (6) Soft Pedal ccH Parameter 43H Soft Pedal Data Range (vvH) 00H-3FH:off, 40H-7FH:on (7) Effect1 Depth (Reverb Send Level) ccH Parameter Data Range (vvH) 5BH Effect1 Depth 00H...7FH Adjusts the reverb send level. (8) Effect4 Depth (Variation Effect Send Level) ccH Parameter Data Range (vvH) 5EH Effect4 Depth 00H...7FH BnH = Control event (n = channel number) cc = Control number vv = Data Range (1) All Sound Off ccH Parameter Data Range (vvH) 78H All Sound Off 00H Switches off all sound from the channel. Does not reset Note On and Hold On conditions established by Channel Messages. (2) Reset All Controllers ccH Parameter 79H Reset All Controllers Resets controllers as follows. Controller Expression Damper Pedal Sostenuto Soft Pedal Data Range (vvH) 00H Value 127 (max) 0 (off) 0 (off) 0 (off) (3) Local Control (reception only) ccH Parameter Data Range (vvH) 7AH Local Control 00H (off), 7FH (on) (4) All Notes Off ccH Parameter Data Range (vvH) 7BH All Notes Off 00H Switches OFF all the notes that are currently ON on the specified channel. Any notes being held by the damper or sostenuto pedal will continue to sound until the pedal is released. (5) Omni Off (reception only) ccH Parameter Data Range (vvH) 7CH Omni Off 00H Same processing as for All Notes Off. (6) Omni On (reception only) ccH Parameter Data Range (vvH) 7DH Omni On 00H Same processing as for All Notes Off. (7) Mono (reception only) ccH Parameter Data Range (vvH) 7EH Mono 00H Same processing as for All Sound Off. (8) Poly (reception only) ccH Parameter Data Range (vvH) 7FH Poly 00H Same processing as for All Sound Off. • When control change reception is turned OFF in the Function mode, control change data will not be transmitted or received except for Bank Select and Mode messages. • Local on/off, OMNI on/off are not transmitted. (The appropriate note off number is supplied with “All Note Off” transmission). • When a voice bank MSB/LSB is received, the number is stored in the internal buffer regardless of the received order, then the stored value is used to select the appropriate voice when a program change message is received. • The Multi-timbre and Poly modes are always active. No change occurs when OMNI ON, OMNI OFF, MONO, or POLY mode messages are received. CLP-130/120 Appendix 71 4. PROGRAM CHANGE 6. SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGES (Yamaha MIDI Format) Data format: [CnH] -> [ppH] CnH = Program event (n = channel number) ppH = Program change number P.C.#=Program Change number CLP-130 GRANDPIANO 1 VARIATION GRANDPIANO 2 VARIATION E.PIANO 1 VARIATION E.PIANO 2 VARIATION HARPSICHORD VARIATION E. CLAVICHORD VARIATION VIBRAPHONE VARIATION CHURCH ORGAN VARIATION JAZZ ORGAN VARIATION STRINGS VARIATION CLP-120 GRANDPIANO 1 — GRANDPIANO 2 — E.PIANO 1 — E.PIANO 2 — HARPSICHORD 1 HARPSICHORD 2 — — VIBRAPHONE — CHURCH ORGAN 1 CHURCH ORGAN 2 JAZZ ORGAN — STRINGS 1 STRINGS 2 CHOIR VARIATION GUITAR VARIATION WOOD BASS VARIATION E.BASS VARIATION CHOIR MSB 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 LSB 122 123 112 112 122 122 122 123 122 123 122 123 122 122 123 122 122 123 122 122 P.C.# 0 0 0 1 5 88 4 4 6 6 7 7 11 12 19 19 16 16 48 49 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 122 123 122 122 122 124 122 122 52 52 24 25 32 32 33 35 — GUITAR — — — — — • When program change reception is turned OFF in the Function mode, no program change data is transmitted or received. Also, Bank MSB/LSB is not transmitted or received. 5. SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGES [rrH] F8H: Timing clock FAH: Start FCH: Stop FEH: Active sensing Data F8H Transmission Transmitted every 96 clocks FAH Recorder start FCH Recorder stop FEH Transmitted every 200 milliseconds Reception Received as 96-clock tempo timing when MIDI clock is set to External Recorder start Not received when the MIDI clock is set to Internal. Recorder stop Not received when the MIDI clock is set to Internal. If a signal is not received via MIDI for more than 400 milliseconds, the same processing will take place for All Sound Off, All Notes Off and Reset All Controllers as when those signals are received. • Caution: If an error occurs during MIDI reception, the Damper, Sostenuto, and Soft effects for all channels are turned off and an All Note Off occurs. 72 CLP-130/120 Appendix Panel Data Transmit Data format: [F0H] -> [43H] -> [0nH] -> [7CH] -> ... -> [F7H] F0H, 43H, 0nH, 7CH (n: channel number) 00H, 2DH (data length) 43H, 4CH, 20H, 20H (CL) 43H, 4CH, 50H, 27H, 30H, 32H (CLP02) 30H, 30H (version x, y) [PANEL DATA] [CHECK SUM (1byte)] = 0-(43H+4CH+20H+......+Data end) F7H • Panel Data Contents (1) 1'st Voice (2) Dual On/Off (3) Dual Voice (4) Dual Balance (5) Dual Detune (6) Dual Voice1 Octave (7) Dual Voice2 Octave (8) Dual Voice1 Effect Depth (9) Dual Voice2 Effect Depth (10) Split On/Off (11) Split Voice (12) Split Point (13) Split Balance (14) Split Voice1 Octave (15) Split Voice2 Octave (16) Split Voice1 Effect Depth (17) Split Voice2 Effect Depth (18) Split Dumper Mode (19) Reverb Type 1 (20) Reverb Type 2 (21) Reverb Depth 1 (22) Reverb Depth 2 (23) Effect Type 1 (24) Effect Type 2 (25) Effect Depth (26) Variation On/Off (27) Touch Sensitivity (28) Fixed Data (29) Left Pedal (30) Soft Pedal Depth (31) Absolute tempo low byte (32) Absolute tempo high byte (33) Key-Off Sampling Depth • Panel data send requests cannot be received. 7. SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGES (Universal System Exclusive) (1) Universal Realtime Message Data format: [F0H] -> [7FH] -> [XnH] -> [04H] -> [01H] -> [llH] -> [mmH] -> [F7H] MIDI Master Volume • Simultaneously changes the volume of all channels. • When a MIDI master volume message is received, the volume only has affect on the MIDI receive channel, not the panel master vol-ume. F0H = Exclusive status 7FH = Universal Realtime 7FH = ID of target device 04H = Sub-ID #1=Device Control Message 01H = Sub-ID #2=Master Volume llH = Volume LSB mmH = Volume MSB F7H = End of Exclusive or F0H = Exclusive status 7FH = Universal Realtime XnH = When n is received n=0~F, whichever is received. X = don’t care 04H = Sub-ID #1=Device Control Message 01H = Sub-ID #2=Master Volume llH = Volume LSB mmH = Volume MSB F7H = End of Exclusive (2) Universal Non-Realtime Message (GM On) General MIDI Mode On Data format: [F0H] -> [7EH] -> [XnH] -> [09H] -> [01H] -> [F7H] F0H = Exclusive status 7EH = Universal Non-Realtime 7FH = ID of target device 09H = Sub-ID #1=General MIDI Message 01H = Sub-ID #2=General MIDI On F7H = End of Exclusive or F0H = Exclusive status 7EH = Universal Non-Realtime XnH = When received, n=0~F. X = don’t care 09H = Sub-ID #1=General MIDI Message 01H = Sub-ID #2=General MIDI On F7H = End of Exclusive When the General MIDI mode ON message is received, the MIDI system will be reset to its default settings. This message requires approximately 50ms to execute, so suffi-cient time should be allowed before the next message is sent. 8. SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGES (XG Standard) (1) XG Native Parameter Change Data format: [F0H] -> [43H] -> [1nH] -> [4CH] -> [hhH] -> [mmH] -> [llH] -> [ddH] -> [F7H] F0H = Exclusive status 43H = YAMAHA ID 1nH = When received, n=0~F. When transmitted, n=0. 4CH = Model ID of XG hhH = Address High mmH = Address Mid llH = Address Low ddH = Data | F7H = End of Exclusive Data size must match parameter size (2 or 4 bytes). When the XG System On message is received, the MIDI system will be reset to its default settings. The message requires approximately 50ms to execute, so sufficient time should be allowed before the next message is sent. (2) XG Native Bulk Data (reception only) Data format: [F0H] -> [43H] -> [0nH] -> [4CH] -> [aaH] -> [bbH] -> [hhH] -> [mmH] -> [llH] ->[ddH] ->...-> [ccH] -> [F7H] F0H = Exclusive status 43H = YAMAHA ID 0nH = When received, n=0~F. When transmitted, n=0. 4CH = Model ID of XG aaH = ByteCount bbH = ByteCount hhH = Address High mmH = Address Mid llH = Address Low ddH = Data | | | | ccH = Check sum F7H = End of Exclusive • Receipt of the XG SYSTEM ON message causes reinitialization of relevant parameters and Control Change values. Allow sufficient time for processing to execute (about 50 msec) before sending the CLP-130/120 another message. • XG Native Parameter Change message may contain two or four bytes of parameter data (depending on the parameter size). • For information about the Address and Byte Count values, refer to Table 1 below. Note that the table’s Total Size value gives the size of a bulk block. Only the top address of the block (00H, 00H, 00H) is valid as a bulk data address. 9. SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGES (Clavinova MIDI Format) Data format: [F0H] -> [43H] -> [73H] -> [xxH] -> [nnH] -> [F7H] F0H = Exclusive status 43H = Yamaha ID 73H = Clavinova ID 01H = Product ID (CLP common) or 7F= Extended Product ID xxH = Product ID (CLP-130: 26H / CLP-120: 25H) nnH = Substatus nn Control 02H Internal MIDI clock 03H External MIDI clock 06H Bulk Data (the bulk data follows 06H) F7H = End of Exclusive * When nn=02H or 03H, Clavinova common ID (01H) is rec-ognized as well as 75H. BULK DUMP FORMAT F0H, 43H, 73H 75F, xxH = Product ID (CLP-130: 26H / CLP-120: 25H) 06H = Bulk ID 05H = Sequence data 0nH, 0nH, 0nH, 0nH, 0nH, 0nH, 0nH, 0nH = Data length [BULK DATA] = [CHECK SUM (1byte)] = 0-sum (BULK DATA) F7H = End of Exclusive 10. SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGES (Special Control) Data format: [F0H] -> [43H] -> [73H] -> [66H] -> [11H] -> [0nH] -> [ccH] -> [vvH] -> [F7H] F0H = 43H = 73H = 7FH = xxH = 11H = 0nH = cc = vv = F7H = Exclusive status Yamaha ID Clavinova ID Extended Product ID Product ID (CLP-130: 26H / CLP-120: 25H) Special control Control MIDI change (n=channel number) Control number Value End of Exclusive Control Split Point Metronome 0n Always 00H Always 00H ccH 14H 1BH vvH 14H : Split Key Number 00H : off 01H : – 02H : 2/4 03H : 3/4 04H : 4/4 05H : 5/4 06H : 6/4 7FH : No accent Damper Level ch: 00H-0FH 3DH(Sets the Damper Level for each channel) 00H-7FH Channel Detune ch: 00H-0FH 43H (Sets the Detune value for each channel) 00H-7FH Voice Reserve ch: 00H-0FH 45H 00H : Reserve off 7FH : on* * When Volume, Expression is received for Reserve On, they will be effective from the next Key On. Reserve Off is normal. 11. SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGES (Others) Data format: [F0H] -> [43H] -> [1nH] -> [27H] -> [30H] -> [00H] -> [00H] -> [mmH] -> [llH] -> [ccH] -> [F7H] Master Tuning (XG and last message priority) simultaneously changes the pitch of all channels. F0H = Exclusive Status 43H = Yamaha ID 1nH = When received, n=0~F. When transmitted, n=0. 27H = Model ID of TG100 30H = Sub ID 00H = 00H = mmH = Master Tune MSB llH = Master Tune LSB ccH = don’t care (under 7FH) F7H = End of Exclusive CLP-130/120 Appendix 73 <Table 1> MIDI Parameter Change table (SYSTEM) Address (H) Size (H) Data (H) 00 00 00 4 020C - 05F4(*1) 01 02 03 04 1 05 1 06 1 7E 7F TOTAL SIZE 07 00 - 7F — 34 - 4C(*2) 00 00 Parameter MASTER TUNE MASTER VOLUME — TRANSPOSE XG SYSTEM ON RESET ALL PARAMETERS Description -50 - +50[cent] 1st bit 3 - 0 ➝ bit 15 - 12 2nd bit 3 - 0 ➝ bit 11 - 8 3rd bit 3 - 0 ➝ bit 7 - 4 4th bit 3 - 0 ➝ bit 3 - 0 0 - 127 Default value (H) 00 04 00 00 400 -12 - +12[semitones] 00=XG sytem ON 00=ON (receive only) 40 7F *1: Values lower than 020CH select -50 cents. Values higher than 05F4H select +50 cents. *2: Values from 28H through 33H are interpreted as -12 through -1. Values from 4DH through 58H are interpreted as +1 through +12. <Table 2> MIDI Parameter Change table (EFFECT 1) Refer to the “Effect MIDI Map” for a complete list of Reverb, Chorus and Variation type numbers. Address (H) 02 01 00 Size (H) 2 02 01 40 2 Data (H) 00-7F 00-7F Parameter REVERB TYPE MSB REVERB TYPE LSB 00-7F VARIATION TYPE MSB 00-7F VARIATION TYPE LSB • “VARIATION” refers to the EFFECT on the panel. Description Refer to Effect MIDI Map 00 : basic type Default value (H) 01(=HALL1) 00 Refer to Effect MIDI Map 00 : basic type 00(=Effect off) 00 Description 0 - 127 Default value (H) 7F <Table 3> MIDI Parameter Change table (MULTI PART) Address (H) Size (H) 08 nn 11 1 nn = Part Number • Effect MIDI Map REVERB MSB ROOM 02H HALL 1 01H HALL 2 01H STAGE 03H Sound board 03H LSB 10H 10H 11H 10H 12H EFFECT CHORUS PHASER TREMOLO DELAY 74 MSB 42H 48H 46H 05H CLP-130/120 Appendix LSB 10H 10H 10H 10H Data (H) 00 - 7F Parameter DRY LEVEL CLP130(E).book Page 75 Thursday, October 31, 2002 2:46 PM [ Clavinova ] MIDI Implementation Chart Model CLP-130/120 MIDI Implementation YAMAHA Function... Transmitted Recognized Basic Channel Default Changed 1 1 - 16 1 1 - 16 Mode Default Messages Altered 3 1 ˛ ************** ˛ ˛ 9 - 120 ************** 0 - 127 0 - 127 Note Number : True voice Velocity Note ON Ø 9nH,v=1-127 Note OFF ˛ 9nH,v=0 Ø ˛ After Touch Key's Ch's ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Pitch Bend Control Change Prog Change 0,32 7 11 64 66 67 91 94 : True # System Exclusive Common Ø Ø : Song Pos. ˛ : Song Sel. ˛ : Tune ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø Ø Ø Ø : : : Mes- : sages: : Ø Ø ˛ Ø Ø ˛ Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø ˛ All Sound Off Reset All Cntrls Local ON/OFF All Notes OFF Active Sense Reset Remarks *1 Poly Mode only 9nH,v=1-127 9nH,v=0 or 8nH Bank Select Volume Expression Damper Sostenuto Soft pedal Reverb Depth Effect Depth ************** System : Clock Real Time : Commands Aux Date : 24,Oct 2001 Version : 1.0 Chart (120,126,127) (121) (122) (123-125) Notes: *1= Recieve Mode is always multi timbre and Poly mode. Mode 1 : OMNI ON , POLY Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 2 : OMNI ON ,MONO Mode 4 : OMNI OFF,MONO Ø ˛ : Yes : No CLP-130/120 Appendix 75 Specifications / Technische Daten / Caractéristiques techniques / Especificaciones Item CLP-130 Keyboard Sound Source CLP-120 88 keys (A-1 - C7) AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling Polyphony Voice Selection AWM Stereo Sampling 64 Notes Max. 14 × 2 variations for each voice Effect 14 Reverb, Effect, Brilliance Volume Master Volume Controls Dual, Split, Metoronome, Transpose, Touch (Hard/Midium/Soft/Fixed), Functions, Speaker ON/OFF Recording/Playback 2-track recording/playback (CLP-130: 3/CLP-120: 1 user songs), Tempo Adjustment, Synchro Start Pedal Demo Songs Jacks/Connectors Main Amplifiers Speakers Dimensions (W × D × H) (with music rest) Weight Accessories Dual, Metoronome, Transpose, Touch (Hard/ Midium/Soft/Fixed), Functions, Speaker ON/ OFF Damper, Sostenuto, Soft 14 voice Demo Songs, 50 preset Songs MIDI (IN/OUT/THRU), PHONES × 2, AUX IN, AUX OUT(L/L+R,R), AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED)(L,R), TO HOST 40W × 2 20W × 2 16cm × 2, 5cm × 2 16cm × 2 1370mm × 518mm × 850mm [53 15/16" × 20 3/8" × 33 7/16"] (1370mm × 518mm × 1020mm) [53 15/16" × 220 3/8" × 40 1/8"] 1370mm × 518mm × 850mm [53 15/16" × 20 3/8" × 33 7/16"] (1370mm × 518mm × 1022mm) [53 15/16" × 220 3/8" × 40 1/4"] 54kg (119lbs., 1oz) 51kg (112lbs., 7oz) Owner’s Manual, “50 greats for the Piano” (Music Book), Bench (included or optional depending on locale) * Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. * Die technischen Daten und Beschreibungen in dieser Bedienungsanleitung dienen nur der Information. Yamaha Corp. behält sich das Recht vor, Produkte oder deren technische Daten jederzeit ohne vorherige Ankündigung zu verändern oder zu modifizieren. Da die technischen Daten, das Gerät selbst oder Sonderzubehör nicht in jedem Land gleich sind, setzen Sie sich im Zweifel bitte mit Ihrem Yamaha-Händler in Verbindung. * Les caractéristiques techniques et les descriptions du mode d’emploi ne sont données que pour information. Yamaha Corp. se réserve le droit de changer ou modifier les produits et leurs caractéristiques techniques à tout moment sans aucun avis. Du fait que les caractéristiques techniques, les équipements et les options peuvent différer d’un pays à l’autre, adressez-vous au distributeur Yamaha le plus proche. * Las especificaciones y descripciones de este manual del propietario tienen sólo el propósito de servir como información. Yamaha Corp. se reserva el derecho a efectuar cambios o modificaciones en los productos o especificaciones en cualquier momento sin previo aviso. Puesto que las especificaciones, equipos u opciones pueden no ser las mismas en todos los mercados, solicite información a su distribuidor Yamaha. 76 CLP-130/120 Appendix IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS INFORMATION RELATING TO PERSONAL INJURY, ELECTRICAL SHOCK, AND FIRE HAZARD POSSIBILITIES HAS BEEN INCLUDED IN THIS LIST. WARNING- When using any electrical or electronic product, basic precautions should always be followed. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Read all Safety Instructions, Installation Instructions, Special Message Section items, and any Assembly Instructions found in this manual BEFORE making any connections, including connection to the main supply. 2. Main Power Supply Verification: Yamaha products are manufactured specifically for the supply voltage in the area where they are to be sold. If you should move, or if any doubt exists about the supply voltage in your area, please contact your dealer for supply voltage verification and (if applicable) instructions. The required supply voltage is printed on the name plate. For name plate location, please refer to the graphic found in the Special Message Section of this manual. 3. This product may be equipped with a polarized plug (one blade wider than the other). If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, turn the plug over and try again. If the problem persists, contact an electrician to have the obsolete outlet replaced. Do NOT defeat the safety purpose of the plug. 4. Some electronic products utilize external power supplies or adapters. Do NOT connect this type of product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the owners manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha. 5. WARNING: Do not place this product or any other objects on the power cord or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’ cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician. 6. Ventilation: Electronic products, unless specifically designed for enclosed installations, should be placed in locations that do not interfere with proper ventilation. If instructions for enclosed installations are not provided, it must be assumed that unobstructed ventilation is required. 7. Temperature considerations: Electronic products should be installed in locations that do not significantly contribute to their operating temperature. Placement of this product close to heat sources such as; radiators, heat registers and other devices that produce heat should be avoided. 8. This product was NOT designed for use in wet/damp locations and should not be used near water or exposed to rain. Examples of wet/damp locations are; near a swimming pool, spa, tub, sink, or wet basement. 9. This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer. If a cart, rack, or stand is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product. 10. The power supply cord (plug) should be disconnected from the outlet when electronic products are to be left unused for extended periods of time. Cords should also be disconnected when there is a high probability of lightning and/or electrical storm activity. 11. Care should be taken that objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure through any openings that may exist. 12. Electrical/electronic products should be serviced by a qualified service person when: a. The power supply cord has been damaged; or b. Objects have fallen, been inserted, or liquids have been spilled into the enclosure through openings; or c. The product has been exposed to rain: or d. The product dose not operate, exhibits a marked change in performance; or e. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure of the product has been damaged. 13. Do not attempt to service this product beyond that described in the user-maintenance instructions. All other servicing should be referred to qualified service personnel. 14. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs. 15. Some Yamaha products may have benches and/or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied as a part of the product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended. PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL 92-469-2 FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/ uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: BLUE : NEUTRAL BROWN : LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. (2 wires) • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT. ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLECTRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU’AU FOND. (polarity) • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. • Ceci ne s’applique qu’aux produits distribués par Yamaha Canada Musique Ltée. (class B) Introduction SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha or the authorized distributor listed below. PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non- products may have either labels similar to the graphics shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions indicated on this page and those indicated in the safety instruction section. rechargable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK. DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings. The exclamation point within the equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within the equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electrical shock. Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the servicer is required by law to return the defective parts. However, you do have the option of having the servicer dispose of these parts for you. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged duce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: 92-469 1 (bottom) Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V., Departamento de ventas Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F. Tel: 686-00-33 BRAZIL NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl- ARGENTINA edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indi- cates the location of the name plate. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA. Av. Rebouças 2636, São Paulo, Brasil Tel: 011-853-1377 Yamaha de Panamá S.A. Sucursal de Argentina Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053, Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 1-4371-7021 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha de Panamá S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: +507-269-5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 IRELAND Danfay Ltd. 61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin Tel: 01-2859177 are tested and approved by an independent safety testing laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is properly installed and used in its normal and customary manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so unless specifically authorized by Yamaha. Product performance and/or safety standards may be diminished. Claims filed under the expressed warranty may be denied if the unit is/has been modified. Implied warranties may also be affected. ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to pro- NORTH AMERICA CANADA beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic products SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante. GERMANY Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN CLP-130 CLP-120 Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Switzerland Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland Tel: 01-383 3990 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-60203900 Model Serial No. THE NETHERLANDS Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Nederland Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: 0347-358 040 Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich. Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo. ASIA FRANCE Yamaha Musique France, S.A. Division Professionnelle BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A. Combo Division Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha-Hazen Música, S.A. Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain Tel: 91-201-0700 GREECE Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House 147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece Tel: 01-228 2160 SWEDEN Yamaha Scandinavia AB J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1 Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 21-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. Tong-Yang Securities Bldg. 16F 23-8 Yoido-dong, Youngdungpo-ku, Seoul, Korea Tel: 02-3770-0661 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 3-703-0900 PHILIPPINES DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 8B DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 FINLAND F-Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511 Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd. 11 Ubi Road #06-00, Meiban Industrial Building, Singapore Tel: 65-747-4374 TAIWAN NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Næringspark 1 N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120 IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-3030 Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei. Taiwan 104, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2511-8688 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 121/60-61 RS Tower 17th Floor, Ratchadaphisek RD., Dindaeng, Bangkok 10320, Thailand Tel: 02-641-2951 THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2317 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971-4-881-5868 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd. 146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa, Auckland, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG Purchase Date Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Belgium Rue de Geneve (Genevastraat) 10, 1140 - Brussels, Belgium Tel: 02-726 6032 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-3273 [CL] 26 Owner's Manual Bedienungsanleitung Mode d'emploi Manual de instrucciones Before using the Clavinova, be sure to read “PRECAUTIONS„ on pages 6 -7. Achten Sie darauf, vor Einsatz des Clavinova die “VORSICHTSMASSNAHMEN„ auf Seite 6-7 durchzulesen. Avant d'utiliser le Clavinova, lire attentivement la section «PRECAUTIONS D'USAGE» aux pages 6-7. Antes de utilizar el Clavinova, lea las “PRECAUCIONES„ que debe tener en cuenta en las páginas 6-7. IMPORTANT Check your power supply Make sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage specified on the name plate on the bottom panel. In some areas a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of the main keyboard unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. To change the setting use a "minus" screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage appears next to the pointer on the panel. WICHTIG Überprüfung der Stromversorgung Vergewissern Sie sich vor dem Anschließen an das Stromnetz, daß die örtliche Netzspannung den Betriebsspannungswerten auf dem Typenschild an der Unterseite des Instruments entspricht. In bestimmten Verkaufsgebieten ist das Instrument mit einem Spannungswähler an der Unterseite neben der Netzkabeldurchführung ausgestattet. Falls vorhanden, muß der Spannungswähler auf die örtliche Netzspannung eingestellt werden. Der Spannungswähler wurde werkseitig auf 240 V voreingestellt. Zum Verstellen drehen Sie den Spannungsregler mit einem Schlitzschraubendreher, bis der Zeiger auf den korrekten Spannungswert weist. IMPORTANT Yamaha Manual Library Contrôler la source d'alimentation Vérifiez que la tension spécifiée sur le panneau inférieur correspond à la tension du secteur. Dans certaines régions, l'instrument peut être équipé d'un sélecteur de tension situé sur le panneau inférieur du clavier à proximité du cordon d'alimentation. Vérifiez que ce sélecteur est bien réglé en fonction de la tension secteur de votre région. Le sélecteur de tension est réglé sur 240 V au départ d'usine. Pour modifier ce réglage, utilisez un tournevis à lame plate pour tourner le sélecteur afin de mettre l'indication correspondant à la tension de votre région vis à vis du repère triangulaire situé sur le panneau. http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/ IMPORTANTE Clavinova Web site (English only) http://www.yamahaclavinova.com/ M.D.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation C 2002 Yamaha Corporation V856070AP???.?-0?B0 Printed in Indonesia Verifique la alimentación de corriente Asegúrese de que tensión de alimentación de CA de su área corresponde con la tensión especificada en la placa de características del panel inferior. En algunas zonas puede haberse incorporado un selector de tensión en el panel inferior de la unidad del teclado principal, cerca del cable de alimentación. Asegúrese de que el selector de tensión esté ajustado a la tensión de su área. El selector de tensión se ajusta a 240V cuando la unidad sale de fábrica. Para cambiar el ajuste, emplee un destornillador de cabeza "recta" para girar el selector de modo que aparezca la tensión correcta al lado del indicador del panel. DIC 338